JP2013179964A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a technique capable of avoiding a prediction probability with respect to a read-ahead presentation, and suppressing a decrease of willingness to play a game by enlarging a range of presentation with the read-ahead presentation.SOLUTION: When a read-ahead presentation (a special determination-ahead presentation) performable condition is furthermore satisfied during the performance of a read-ahead presentation (a determination-ahead presentation) (S150: Yes), the kind of a read-ahead presentation (a total presentation time) is determined by read-ahead presentation lottery (S151). Then, the number of storage of a lottery element is confirmed (S152), and a variable pattern determination element (a variable pattern determination random number) is rewritten into a variable pattern determination element corresponding to a special variable pattern having a fixed variable time in accordance with the number of storage of the lottery element (S153). In this case, a special determination-ahead presentation is performed following the determination-ahead presentation, and consequently, a read-ahead presentation is allowed to continue. Thus, a prediction probability with respect to a read-ahead presentation is avoided and also the range of a presentation with the read-ahead presentation can be enlarged.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a symbol in a manner that displays a result of a lottery after a symbol change display.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that refers to a variable time table different from the normal time after the end of two rounds probable big hit game or after the small hit game (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the technique of Patent Document 1, when the big hit gaming state based on the determination that the big hit type is “suddenly probable” in the normal gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the probable gaming state and the production mode is changed to the special production mode. I am migrating. Even when the game state before the small hit game state is the normal game state, when the small hit game state ends, the special effect mode is entered. In this special effect mode, the variable display pattern is determined with reference to the variable display pattern determination table different from the normal effect mode, and the average variable display time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is different from that in the normal effect mode. Yes.

  For this reason, according to the technique of Patent Document 1, the transition to the special effect mode is made after the end of the two-round probability variation big hit game and after the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is considered that the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the player's expectation for becoming a high probability gaming state.

  Further, as a technique similar to the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, there is a technique of referring to the same variation pattern table after the end of the two-round probability variable big hit game or the small hit game without activating the time shortening function (for example, Patent Documents). 2).

  That is, the technique of Patent Document 2 executes the first jackpot game (15 round jackpot game) when the special symbol is the normal jackpot symbol or the probability variation jackpot symbol, and more than the first jackpot game when the special symbol is the specific jackpot symbol. A second big hit game that ends in a short time (two round big hit game) is executed, and when the special symbol is a small hit symbol, a small hit game having the same content as the second big hit game is executed. Then, after the first big hit game is finished, the release extension function is started (shifted to a time reduction state), and after the second big hit game or the small hit game is finished, the opening time is extended when the hit game is started. The operating state of the function is maintained (if the time reduction state is inactive, the inactive state is maintained).

  In the technique of Patent Document 2, after the first big hit game is finished, a special symbol variation pattern table corresponding to the operation state of the probability variation function is selected, while after the second big hit game or after the small hit game is finished, The same special symbol variation pattern table is referenced.

  For this reason, according to the technique of Patent Document 2, it is difficult for a player to determine whether the player hits the second big hit (two rounds of probable big hit) or hits a small hit, and the so-called latent probability changing state is estimated. It is considered that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is difficult to do.

  In addition, as a prior art different from these, there is known a gaming machine that performs an effect different from usual by storing (holding) prefetching (for example, Patent Document 3).

  In the technique of Patent Document 3, pre-transmission effect mode transition lottery is executed by pre-reading the memory, and the mode is continued while the pre-read memory exists. And if a certain trigger hold is a memory that has been determined internally for the big hit or super reach, decide whether to perform the pre-reading effect based on the contents of all the memories including the trigger hold Yes.

  For this reason, according to the technique of Patent Document 3, even if the prefetch effect can be executed, the prefetch effect is not executed depending on the content of the memory. It is thought that the situation that causes a sense of incongruity can be prevented and the consistency of the production can be maintained.

JP 2008-48915 A JP 2010-5099 A JP 2010-29233 A

  Each of the above-mentioned prior arts is advantageous in that the selection of the variation pattern is devised and the execution of pre-reading effects is restricted to broaden the range of effects of the gaming machine and improve the interest of the player. There is sex.

Here, the pre-reading effect is an effect executed as a part of a so-called notice effect, and is usually executed across a plurality of variations.
For example, as an example of a recent look-ahead effect, there is an effect of changing a memory marker to a special form (for example, an effect of changing a blue memory marker to a red memory marker). Another example of pre-reading effects is to enter a special zone with a limited number of variations (for example, a special zone where the background image has been changed from a daytime background image to a nighttime background image), and fluctuation within the special zone is a chance. There is also a production that suggests that.

Such a pre-reading effect may be executed across a plurality of symbol variations, but the number of consecutive pre-reading effects is not executed exceeding the upper limit of the stored number.
That is, in the case of a model equipped with only one special symbol, the upper limit of the number of consecutive prefetch effects is four. In addition, if the model has two special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) and the second special symbol fluctuates preferentially, the upper limit of the number of consecutive look-ahead effects is still four. is there. On the other hand, if the model is equipped with two special symbols and the memory corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested in the order of acquisition, the upper limit of the number of consecutive prefetch effects is the upper limit of the memory of both symbols. The total number is 8 times.

  Thus, the reason why there is an upper limit to the number of consecutive prefetch effects is based on the characteristics of the prefetch effects. In the first place, the pre-reading effect is an effect in which the expectation of the big hit of the target change is transmitted to the player before the change to be prefetched arrives, which is a so-called advance notice effect.

  For this reason, the pre-reading effect in the past does not continue the pre-reading effect exceeding the upper limit number of memories, and the continuous number of times is continued over a maximum of four or eight fluctuations. In addition, the timing of the end of the production is a certain degree of predictable production content. For example, when one memory is consumed from the state where there are three memories and the prefetching effect is started, the remaining memory becomes two, but the prefetching effect is continued only for the remaining two memories at the maximum. Is. Therefore, even if a new lottery element is stored during execution of the prefetching effect, the prefetching effect is not continued beyond the remaining two memories.

  Fortunately, it is only necessary to be lucky if the series of pre-reading effects is executed, but if the series of pre-reading effects is not connected to the big hit or the reach effect is not executed, the game flow is temporarily interrupted there. It will end up.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, there are various types of pre-reading effects, and game machines that perform effects that add strength to the contents of the pre-reading effects according to the reliability of the big hits have also appeared. .
However, if a look-ahead effect with a relatively low degree of reliability with respect to the big hit is executed, the remaining memory at that time may be annihilated (all lost). Then, even though a plurality of memories are held, the expectation for the big hit is lowered before the remaining memories are consumed, and there is a possibility that the willingness to play is distracted.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of avoiding the predictability with respect to the pre-reading effect, expanding the range of the effect by the pre-reading effect, and suppressing the decrease in the game motivation.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution solves the problem that a symbol (for a predetermined fluctuation time) is executed when an internal lottery relating to a player's profit (for example, a profit that an operation opportunity of a variable winning device is generated) is executed. For example, a symbol display means for stopping and displaying (determining display) a symbol in a mode (for example, a mode preliminarily associated with winning) representing the result of the internal lottery after variably displaying a symbol visually recognized) And a variation pattern defining means for preliminarily defining a plurality of variation patterns with respect to a variation pattern related to the variation time of the symbols displayed by the symbol display means, and when a lottery trigger occurs during the game, it is necessary to execute the internal lottery. A lottery element acquisition unit for acquiring a lottery element, and the variation pattern defining unit defined by the lottery element acquisition unit by the lottery element acquisition unit Fluctuation pattern determination element acquisition means for acquiring a fluctuation pattern determination element for determining which one to select from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns, lottery element acquired by the lottery element acquisition means, and acquisition of the fluctuation pattern determination element Storage means for storing the variation pattern determination elements acquired by the means in the order of acquisition, and when a start condition for starting the symbol variation display by the symbol display means is satisfied, the lottery elements stored in the storage means An internal lottery execution unit that consumes in the stored order and executes the internal lottery, and when the internal lottery is executed by the internal lottery execution unit, based on the variation pattern determination element corresponding to the consumed lottery element A variation pattern determining means for selectively determining one of a plurality of variation patterns, and at least a previous one A symbol effect executing means for executing a stop display effect corresponding to a symbol stop display by the symbol display means after executing a variable display effect corresponding to a symbol variable display by the symbol display means within a variable time; When the lottery element is newly stored by the storage means, the lottery result destination determination means for determining in advance at least the result of the internal lottery using the new lottery element before the start condition is satisfied; When the variation pattern determination element is newly stored by the storage means, any variation pattern is selected from the plurality of variation patterns using the new variation pattern determination element before the start condition is satisfied. A variation pattern destination determination unit that determines whether the lottery result is in advance and a specific lottery element newly stored by the storage unit. If the determination result in advance by the determination means or the variation pattern destination determination means satisfies a specific condition, the lottery result is obtained using at least a specific period until the specific lottery element is consumed by the internal lottery execution means. A pre-determination effect executing unit that executes a pre-determination effect (pre-reading effect) reflecting a previous determination result by the pre-determination unit or the variation pattern destination determination unit, and a pre-determination effect being executed by the pre-determination effect execution unit. A special lottery element is newly stored by the storage means within a certain specific period, and the previously determined special lottery element is determined in advance by the lottery result destination determination means or the variation pattern destination determination means. When a special condition is satisfied, at least using the special period until the special lottery element is consumed by the internal lottery execution means, A special destination determination effect (prefetching effect) that reflects the prior determination result by the lottery result destination determination means or the variation pattern destination determination means and that has relevance with the effect content of the preceding determination effect is executed. And a special destination determination effect executing means.

A game by the gaming machine of the present invention proceeds, for example, along the flow shown below.
(1) When an internal lottery related to a player's profit is executed during a game, the symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery. It takes a certain amount of time (fluctuation time and stop display time) from the start of the symbol display to the stop display. Once the symbol display is started, the stop display is completed. The next lottery will not be held until

(2) A plurality of variation patterns are defined in advance for the variation pattern related to the variation time of the symbol according to (1) above. The fluctuation pattern includes various fluctuation patterns such as a non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern, a deviation fluctuation pattern after reach, a fluctuation pattern after reach, and the like.

(3) When a lottery trigger occurs during the game (a prize is generated at the upper starting prize opening, a prize is awarded at the lower starting prize opening), the lottery elements necessary for executing the internal lottery (1) Random number) is acquired. In order to execute the internal lottery, a lottery opportunity must be generated as a precondition. For this reason, the player plays a game with the first goal being to generate a prize at the upper start prize opening or the lower start prize opening which becomes the lottery opportunity. A lottery opportunity occurs randomly (or accidentally or randomly), and when a lottery opportunity occurs randomly, a lottery element is acquired each time.

(4) Accompanying the acquisition of the lottery element according to (3) above, a variation pattern determining element (variation pattern determination) for determining which one of the plurality of variation patterns defined by (2) is selected. Random number) is acquired. The variation pattern determining element is an element that determines the variation display mode of the symbol (1).

(5) The lottery element acquired in (3) and the variation pattern determination element acquired in (4) are stored in the order of acquisition. However, a predetermined upper limit (for example, four per symbol) is provided for the number of memories, and the number of memories does not increase beyond this upper limit. Here, the lottery element and the variation pattern determination element may be stored in the same storage area or may be stored in different storage areas, but are stored in association with each other.

(6) The start condition (for example, the condition that the symbol stop display is confirmed if the symbol is not changing and the previous change has been made) for starting the symbol change display according to (1) above. When satisfied, the lottery elements stored in (5) above are consumed in the order in which they are stored, and an internal lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed.

(7) When the internal lottery is executed according to (6) above, any variation pattern is selected from the plurality of variation patterns in (2) based on the variation pattern determination element corresponding to the consumed lottery element. It is determined selectively.

(8) The change display effect (scroll display effect of the effect symbol) is executed within the change time of the symbol of (1) above, and the stop display effect (stop display of the effect symbol is displayed within the stop display time of (1) above. Production) is executed.

(9) When a lottery element is newly stored in (5) above, at least the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance using the new lottery element before the start condition is satisfied. Thereby, before the new lottery element is actually consumed, the result of the internal lottery (whether it is a win or not) is determined.

(10) When a variation pattern determining element is newly stored in (5) above, any variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns using the new variation pattern determining element before the start condition is satisfied. It is determined in advance whether it will be performed. As a result, the variation pattern when the new lottery element is consumed before the new lottery element is actually consumed is found.

(11) For the specific lottery element newly stored in (5) above, when the previous determination result in (9) or (10) satisfies a specific condition (for example, the determination result of winning or a specific When the determination result that the reach effect is executed by selecting the fluctuation pattern is obtained and the predetermined effect execution lottery is won), at least the specific lottery element is consumed by the above (6) Using the specific period until it is performed, the destination determination effect reflecting the previous determination result according to (9) or (10) is executed.

  The first determination effect can be an effect of various contents, and can be an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit based on the effect content and the continuity of the effect. For example, if the determination result according to (9) above is “a particular lottery element corresponds to a win”, an effect with a very high expectation degree of jackpot is performed, or the determination result according to (10) is “a constant value” If a variation pattern having the above-described variation seconds is selected, it is possible to perform an effect with a high expectation level that a reach effect is executed. Here, the first determination effect is an effect that is executed using at least a specific period until the specific lottery element is consumed, but continues until the fluctuation display when the specific lottery element is consumed. It can also be made.

(12) A special lottery element is newly stored by the above (5) within the specific period during which the pre-determination effect according to the above (11) is being executed, and the special lottery element newly stored is (9) ) Or when the previous determination result according to (10) satisfies a special condition (for example, a determination result that a reach effect is executed by selecting a winning determination result or a specific variation pattern is obtained. In the case where a predetermined effect execution lottery is won), at least using the special period until the special lottery element is consumed according to (6) above, in advance according to (9) or (10) above The special destination determination effect of the contents reflecting the determination result of (11) and having the relevance with the effect contents of the previous determination effect of (11) is executed.

  The special destination determination effect can also be an effect of various contents, similar to the previous determination effect, and can be an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit by the effect content and the continuity of the effect. For example, if the determination result according to (9) above is “a particular lottery element corresponds to a win”, an effect with a very high expectation degree of jackpot is performed, or the determination result according to (10) is “a constant value” If a variation pattern having the above-described variation seconds is selected, it is possible to perform an effect with a high expectation level that a reach effect is executed. Here, the special destination determination effect is an effect that is executed using at least a special period until the special lottery element is consumed, but until the variation display when the special lottery element is consumed It can also be continued.

In addition, when the special destination determination effect is executed during the execution of the destination determination effect executed during the specific period, the specific period and the special period overlap. In this case, the remaining part of the specific period is switched to the special period, and the special destination determination effect is executed in the special period.
Note that the predetermination effect and the special predetermination effect are both types of prefetching effects, but the predetermination effect is an effect that is executed first, and the special predetermination effect is performed during the execution of the predetermination effect or the predetermination effect. This is an effect that is executed after ending.

Thus, according to this solution, when a specific condition is satisfied, first, the first determination effect is executed first. If a special condition is satisfied during the execution of the destination determination effect, a special destination determination effect having relevance to the effect content of the destination determination effect is executed.
That is, when a new lottery element is stored during execution of the pre-reading effect and a special condition is satisfied, the pre-reading effect is continued beyond the remaining stored number.
For this reason, it will be in the state which does not know how long a pre-reading effect continues, and the predictability with respect to a pre-reading effect can be avoided about the continuation number of times of a pre-reading effect and an end timing.

  In addition, even if the destination determination effect is executed for the maximum memory number, if the special condition is satisfied during the execution of the destination determination effect, the special destination determination effect exceeds the maximum memory number. Will be executed. That is, in the present solution, the prefetch effect can be executed exceeding the maximum memory number (4 or 8).

  For this reason, even if a series of pre-reading effects is completed, if there are lottery elements that can execute the pre-reading effects, the pre-reading effects are executed exceeding the maximum number of memories. Even when the game is about to end, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the prefetching effect may still continue.

  In addition, in the conventional look-ahead effect, when a look-ahead effect with a relatively low reliability for the big hit is executed, the remaining memory may be annihilated at that point in time. Depending on the conditions of the pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effect can be continued as much as possible, so that the sense of expectation for the big hit is reduced before the remaining memory is consumed, and there is no possibility that the game motivation will be distracted.

  The pre-reading effect is expanded by executing the pre-reading effect by combining the pre-decision effect and the special pre-decision effect, and the possibility of continuing the pre-reading effect beyond the maximum number of memories is given. A new game characteristic can be exhibited, and the decline in the game motivation can be suppressed.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution is the solution 1, wherein the variation pattern defining means further defines a plurality of special variation patterns with fixed variation times as the plurality of variation patterns, For a specific lottery element newly stored by the storage means, if a previous determination result by the lottery result destination determination means or the variation pattern destination determination means satisfies a specific condition, the determination result is executed by the destination determination effect execution means. When the total effect time of the first determination effect is determined by the first total effect time determination unit that determines the total effect time of the destination determination effect and the first total effect time determination unit, By selecting a special variation pattern, at least one or a plurality of lottery elements stored before the specific lottery element are consumed. The first variation time matching means for matching the total variation time of the symbols displayed in a variable manner with the total effect time of the destination determination effect, and within the specific period during the execution of the destination determination effect by the destination determination effect execution means. When a special lottery element is newly stored by the storage means, and the previous determination result by the lottery result destination determination means or the variation pattern destination determination means satisfies a special condition for the newly stored special lottery element The second total effect time determining means for determining the total effect time of the special destination determination effect executed by the special destination determination effect executing means, and the total effect of the special destination determination effect by the second total effect time determining means When the time is determined, the variation pattern regardless of the relationship between the total variation time matched by the first variation time matching means and the total performance time of the first determination effect. When the special variation pattern is selected by the setting means, the total variation time of the symbols that are variably displayed when at least one or a plurality of lottery elements stored before the special lottery element is consumed is determined as the special variation pattern. A gaming machine characterized by further comprising second variation time matching means for matching the total production time of the first determination production.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) A plurality of special variation patterns with fixed variation times are further defined as a plurality of variation patterns. The special variation pattern is a variation pattern used when performing a pre-reading effect such as a pre-determination effect or a special pre-determination effect. For example, the special variation pattern A having a variation time of 10 seconds and the special variation having a variation time of 20 seconds. A plurality of types of patterns B and the like are prepared in advance.

(2) For a newly stored specific lottery element, when a prior determination result satisfies a specific condition (for example, when a reach effect is executed by selecting a determination result of win or a specific variation pattern) In the case where a predetermined production execution lottery is won), the total production time of the first judgment production (total production time, overall production scale) is determined. That is, at this point in time, it is not determined what the content of the previous determination effect will be, but the total effect time of the previous determination effect will be determined.

(3) When the total production time of the pre-decision production is determined by (2) above, by storing (using) the special variation pattern of (1) above, at least before a specific lottery element is stored The total variation time of the symbols that are variably displayed when the one or more lottery elements that have been consumed is consumed is matched with the total performance time of the preceding determination effect of (2). For example, if three lottery elements are stored before a specific lottery element, the total variation time of at least three lottery elements is made to coincide with the total performance time.

(4) And, for a special lottery element newly stored within a specific period during which the pre-decision effect is being executed, if the prior determination result satisfies a special condition (for example, the determination result of winning or a specific change) When a determination result that a reach effect is executed by selecting a pattern is obtained and a predetermined effect execution lottery is won), the total effect time of the special destination determination effect (total effect time, overall Production scale) is determined. That is, at this point in time, the content of the special destination determination effect is not determined, but the total performance time of the special destination determination effect is determined.

(5) When the total production time of the special destination determination production is determined by (4) above, by selecting (using) the special variation pattern of (1) above, at least before the special lottery element The total variation time of the symbols variably displayed as one or more stored lottery elements are consumed is matched with the total performance time of the special destination determination effect (4). For example, if three lottery elements are stored before a special lottery element, the total variation time of at least three lottery elements is made to coincide with the total performance time. In this case, even if the total performance time of the first determination effect is matched with the total variation time, this is canceled and the total performance time of the special destination determination effect is matched with the total variation time. In other words, the match between the total effect time and the total variation time of the first determination effect is canceled (resolved). However, when the effect of the first determination effect has progressed to the final stage (when the execution of the last effect part has already started), the special destination determination effect is executed after the end of the first determination effect. .

As described above, according to the present solution means, the total effect time of the pre-decision effect is determined first, and the symbol variation time is determined in accordance with the determined total effect time. The production time can be secured.
For this reason, since the fluctuation time does not change depending on the number of memories at the start of the fluctuation, it is possible to effectively execute the destination determination effect that enhances the content of the effect.

  In addition, even when performing continuous production with contents, in order to determine the variation time of the pattern according to the total production time of the first determination production, it is not necessary to prepare the production corresponding to all the fluctuation times, Since the control contents are not complicated, it is possible to improve the range of effects by the pre-reading effect while reducing the program capacity and the image capacity. Thereby, even if it is a case where a predetermining effect is performed across a plurality of fluctuations, a predetermining effect with consistency (story property) can be executed.

  In addition, in the present solution, if the execution conditions for the prefetch effect are satisfied again during execution of a series of prefetch effects, the predetermination effect to be executed first or the predetermination effect being executed is executed. Instead, a special destination determination effect is executed. For this reason, it is possible to execute an effect in consideration of the total effect time of the pre-determination effect and the special pre-determination effect, instead of simply continuously executing the two pre-read effects. In addition, when executing the special destination determination effect instead of the destination determination effect, the variation time corresponding to the total effect time of the special destination determination effect can be reset, so a consistent effect across the variations can be achieved. There is an effect that it can be realized (the contents of the story can be changed flexibly).

  Solving means 3: The gaming machine of the present solving means is that in the solving means 1 or 2, the special destination determination effect executing means executes the destination determination effect corresponding to non-winning by the destination determination effect executing means. And, if the previous determination result by the lottery result destination determination unit or the variation pattern destination determination unit is a determination result that the lottery element corresponds to the winning, it corresponds to the winning as satisfying the special condition The gaming machine is characterized in that the special destination determination effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine of this solving means, when a pre-decision effect corresponding to non-winning is performed (a series of pre-reading effects that will ultimately be non-winning), it is stored during the execution of the pre-decision effect. When it is determined in advance that the lottery element is a lottery element corresponding to the winning, a special predetermining effect corresponding to the winning (a series of pre-reading effects that are ultimately won) is executed.

  As described above, according to the present solution, even if the destination determination effect corresponding to the non-winning is initially executed, the special destination determination effect corresponding to the winning can be executed after changing the schedule. For this reason, even if a look-ahead effect with a relatively low reliability for the big hit is executed at first, the content of the effect may be changed to a look-ahead effect with a high reliability for the big hit after that. It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect with a player and to maintain the player's expectation.

  Solving means 4: The gaming machine of the present solving means according to any one of the solving means 1 to 3, wherein the special destination determination effect executing means uses the storage means within the special period during which the special destination determination effect is being executed. If a special lottery element is further stored, and the pre-determined result by the lottery result destination determination unit or the variation pattern destination determination unit satisfies the special condition for the stored special lottery element, at least the special lottery element The gaming machine is characterized in that the special destination determination effect is executed using a period until the lottery element is consumed by the internal lottery execution means.

  In the gaming machine of the present solution, a special lottery element is further stored within a special period during which the special destination determination effect is being executed, and the prior determination result satisfies a special condition for the stored special lottery element. In this case, the special destination determination effect is executed using at least the period until the special lottery element is consumed.

  According to this solution, as long as the previous determination result continues to satisfy the special condition, the special destination determination effect can be continuously executed. For this reason, if the special pre-determination effect is executed after the pre-determination effect, the pre-reading effect is not ended, and the special pre-determination effect may be executed again after the special pre-determination effect. A new playability that can be continued forever can be exhibited.

  Solving means 5: The gaming machine of the present solving means according to any one of the solving means 1 to 4, wherein the special destination determination effect execution means has a result of a prior determination by the lottery result destination determination means or the variation pattern destination determination means. In any game, the special destination determination effect is executed as if the special condition is satisfied as long as the lottery element is present when the start condition is satisfied. Machine.

  In the gaming machine of the present solution, regardless of the determination result in advance, as long as the starting condition is satisfied, as long as the lottery element exists, the special destination determination effect is provided as satisfying the special condition. Executed.

  In the present solution, since the special condition is satisfied as long as the lottery element exists, the special condition becomes a condition that is relatively easily satisfied. Moreover, this condition is not a condition based on the result of the internal lottery, but is a condition that can be satisfied depending on how the game is played (for example, continuing to launch a game ball). Thus, according to this solution, as long as the lottery element exists, the special destination determination effect continues to be executed, so the player is motivated not to interrupt the memory of the lottery element, The operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

[Two methods to match the total variation time to the total performance time]
In the solution means 2 described above, when the total effect time of the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect is determined, the special variation pattern is selected and stored at least before the specific lottery element or the special lottery element. In addition, the total variation time of the symbols variably displayed as one or more lottery elements are consumed is matched with the total performance time.

And, as a concrete and efficient realization method to match the total variation time with the total production time, (A) a method of rewriting the variation pattern determining element, and (B) forcibly special variation without rewriting the variation pattern determining element There is a method of selecting a pattern.
Here, in the following solution means 6, the method (A) is adopted, and in the solution means 7 described later, the method (B) is adopted.

  Solution 6: The gaming machine of the present solution means that in any one of the solution means 2 to 5, the first variation time matching means corresponds to at least a lottery element stored before the specific lottery element. Rewriting the variation pattern determining element causes the variation pattern determining means to select the special variation pattern, and the second variation time matching means corresponds to at least a lottery element stored before the special lottery element. According to another aspect of the present invention, the variation pattern determining element is rewritten to cause the variation pattern determining means to select the special variation pattern.

In the gaming machine of this solution, the special variation pattern is selected by rewriting the variation pattern determination element corresponding to the lottery element stored before the specific lottery element or the special lottery element.
The symbol variation pattern is determined at the start of symbol variation, and is determined based on a variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) acquired when a lottery trigger occurs.

  For example, if the value of the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) is “X”, the variation pattern corresponding to “X” is uniquely determined by referring to the variation pattern selection table. For this reason, if the value of the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) is rewritten from “X” to “Y”, the variation pattern corresponding to “Y” is selected at the start of variation. If the variation pattern corresponding to “Y” is a special variation pattern, the value of the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) is rewritten from “X” to “Y”, so that the special variation pattern is changed at the start of the variation. It can be intentionally selected.

  In this way, in the present solution, the variation pattern selected at the start of variation can be changed to the special variation pattern with a simple control process that only rewrites the variation pattern determination element, so that the control processing is simplified. be able to.

  Solution 7: The gaming machine according to this solution means that in any one of solution means 2 to 5, the first variation time matching means corresponds to at least a lottery element stored before the specific lottery element. The variation pattern determining element is forced to select a special variation pattern without rewriting the variation pattern determining element and without using the variation pattern determining element, and the second variation time matching means includes at least the special lottery element. The variation pattern determining element corresponding to the lottery element stored before is not rewritten, and the variation pattern determining means is forcibly selected without using the variation pattern determining element. This is a gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine of the present solution means, unlike the solution means 6 described above, a variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) corresponding to a lottery element stored before a specific lottery element or a special lottery element Do not rewrite the value. Therefore, for example, if the value of the variation pattern determining element (variation pattern determination random number) is “X”, the variation pattern corresponding to “X” is selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table. Become. However, in this case, the variation pattern corresponding to “X” is not necessarily a special variation pattern. Therefore, in this solution, at the beginning of the fluctuation, the special pattern is forced to be used without using the fluctuation pattern determination element acquired along with the acquisition of the lottery element (ignoring even if the fluctuation pattern determination element is acquired). A variation pattern is selected.

  For this reason, in this solution means, the process which rewrites a variation pattern determination element becomes unnecessary. This is an effective control process when there is a situation where the variation pattern determining element cannot be rewritten.

  Solution 8: The gaming machine of the present solution is the game machine according to any one of solutions 2 to 7, wherein the first variation time matching means is stored before the specific lottery element and the specific lottery element. Alternatively, the total variation time of the symbol that is variably displayed when a plurality of lottery elements are consumed is matched with the total performance time of the destination determination effect, and the second variation time matching means includes the special lottery element and the special lottery element. A total variation time of a symbol that is variably displayed by consuming one or a plurality of lottery elements stored before a random lottery element is matched with a total performance time of the special destination determination effect Machine.

  In the gaming machine of the present solution, not only a lottery element stored before a specific lottery element or a special lottery element but also a specific lottery element or a special lottery element to be prefetched is consumed. The total variation time of the symbols displayed in a variable manner is matched with the total performance time. That is, the fluctuation time when a specific lottery element or a special lottery element is consumed is also included in the total performance time.

  For this reason, according to this solution means, not only simply executing a series of pre-determination effects and special destination determination effects, but also in the series of pre-determination effects and special destination determination effects, As a result, the efficiency of the game can be improved and the result of the internal lottery can be transmitted to the player more quickly.

  Solution 9: The gaming machine of this solution means that in any of solution means 2 to 8, the first variation time matching means indicates the number of lottery elements stored before the specific lottery element. Based on the specific lottery element exclusion remaining memory number, the total effect time of the first determination effect is equally divided, and the change pattern determining means selects the change pattern determining unit having a change time that matches the equally divided time, and the second The variation time matching means equally divides the total performance time of the special destination determination effect based on the special lottery element exclusion remaining memory number indicating the number of lottery elements stored before the special lottery element, etc. The gaming machine is characterized by causing the variation pattern determining means to select a special variation pattern having a variation time corresponding to the divided time.

  In the gaming machine of this solution, the total effect time is equally divided based on the specific lottery element excluded remaining memory number or the special lottery element excluded remaining memory number, and a special variation pattern having a variation time that matches the equally divided time is selected. Will be. Here, the “specific lottery element excluded remaining storage number” is the total number of other lottery elements excluding a specific lottery element. The “special lottery element excluded remaining storage number” is the total number of other lottery elements excluding special lottery elements.

  For example, if the total effect time of the first determination effect is determined to be “30 seconds” and the specific lottery element excluded remaining storage number is “3”, the lottery element stored before the specific lottery element is consumed. In this case, a special variation pattern having a variation time of “10 seconds” that is a value obtained by dividing “30 seconds” by “3” is selected.

  Similarly, if the total performance time of the special destination determination effect is determined to be “30 seconds” and the special lottery element exclusion remaining storage number is “3”, the lottery element stored before the special lottery element is stored. When consumed, a special variation pattern having a variation time of “10 seconds” that is a value obtained by dividing “30 seconds” by “3” is selected.

  According to this solution, since the total production time of the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect is equally divided, the lengths of the respective production parts included in the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect are the same, and It is possible to execute a balanced look-ahead effect without causing the production part to be extremely short or extremely long.

  Solution 10: The gaming machine of the present solution means that in any one of solution means 2 to 8, the first variation time matching means is stored before the specific lottery element and the specific lottery element. Based on the number of remaining lottery elements including the number of lottery elements, the total effect time of the first determination effect is equally divided, and a special variation pattern having a variation time that matches the equally divided time is used as the variation pattern determination means. And the second variation time matching means selects the special lottery element based on the special lottery element and the number of lottery elements stored before the special lottery element. The gaming machine is characterized in that the total effect time of the determination effect is equally divided, and the variation pattern determining means selects the special variation pattern having a variation time corresponding to the equally divided time.

  In the gaming machine of this solution, the total effect time is equally divided based on the specific lottery element-containing remaining memory number or the special lottery element-containing remaining memory number, and a special variation pattern having a variation time that matches the equally divided time is selected. Is done. Here, the “specific lottery element-containing remaining memory number” is the total number of lottery elements including a specific lottery element. The “special lottery element-containing remaining memory count” is the total number of lottery elements including special lottery elements.

  For example, if the total effect time of the first determination effect is determined to be “30 seconds” and the remaining number of stored memories containing the specific lottery element is “3”, the lottery elements stored before the specific lottery element are consumed. When a special variation pattern having a variation time of “10 seconds” that is a value obtained by dividing “30 seconds” by “3” is selected, and when a specific lottery element is consumed, “30 A special variation pattern having a variation time of “10 seconds” that is a value obtained by dividing “second” by “3” is selected.

  Similarly, if the total effect time of the special destination determination effect is determined to be “30 seconds” and the remaining number of special lottery element-containing memories is “3”, the lottery element stored before the special lottery element is When consumed, a special variation pattern having a variation time of “10 seconds” which is a value obtained by dividing “30 seconds” by “3” is selected, and even when a special lottery element is consumed, A special variation pattern having a variation time of “10 seconds” that is a value obtained by dividing “30 seconds” by “3” is selected.

  According to this solution, since the total production time of the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect is equally divided, the lengths of the respective production parts included in the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect are the same, and It is possible to execute a balanced destination determination effect without causing the production part to be extremely short or extremely long. In addition, in the present solution, the specific effect that is executed when a specific lottery element or special lottery element is consumed is also the same length as the length of each effect part included in the destination determination effect or the special destination determination effect. Thus, it is possible to execute a comprehensive effect that enhances the continuity between the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect.

  Solving means 11: The gaming machine of the present solving means in any one of the solving means 2 to 10, wherein the preceding determination effect executing means is during the one time symbol variation display by the symbol display means, or the symbol display means The point determination effect is executed over a plurality of times of symbol change display by the special point determination effect execution means during the one time symbol change display by the symbol display means or the symbol display. The special destination determination effect is executed across a plurality of symbol variation displays by the means, and when the total effect time of the destination determination effect is determined by the first total effect time determination means, the destination determination First destination determination information for notifying the destination determination effect execution means of information about the total effect time of the effect and information about how many times the symbol variation display is used to execute the destination determination effect. When the total effect time of the special destination determination effect is determined by the intelligent means and the second total effect time determination means, information on the total effect time of the special destination determination effect and how many times the symbol variation display is used And a second destination determination information notifying means for notifying the special destination determination effect executing means of information on whether or not to execute the special destination determination effect.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) The first determination effect is executed during one symbol variation display or across a plurality of symbol variation displays.
(2) The special destination determination effect is also executed during one symbol variation display or across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

(3) When the total production time of the destination determination effect is determined, information on the total presentation time of the destination determination effect and information on how many times the symbol variation display is used to execute the destination determination effect It is notified to the determination effect execution means (pre-determination information command).
(4) Similarly, when the total performance time of the special destination determination effect is determined, information on the total performance time of the special destination determination effect and how many times the symbol variation display is used to execute the special destination determination effect Is notified to the special destination determination effect execution means (special destination determination information command).

  According to this solving means, since information related to accurate pre-determination is notified from the main control device to the effect control device, the effect control device performs an event such as “the type of prefetch effect to be executed has been changed”. It is possible to accurately recognize, and when executing the destination determination effect or the special destination determination effect, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the effect control process while ensuring the accuracy when the effect is executed.

  Solving means 12: The gaming machine of the present solving means according to any one of the solving means 1 to 11, wherein the destination determination effect executing means performs the destination determination effect across a plurality of symbol variation displays by the symbol display means. When executing, the destination determination effect having continuity in the content of the effect is executed, and the special destination determination effect execution means performs the special destination determination effect across a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays by the symbol display means. A game machine characterized in that, when executed, the special destination determination effect having continuity in the content of the effect and having the continuity of the effect content of the destination determination effect by the destination determination effect execution means is executed. is there.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) When executing a destination determination effect over a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays, a destination determination effect having continuity in the content of the effect is executed. For example, when the preceding determination effect is executed over three symbol variation displays, the effect of each time is an effect having continuity (effect A1 → effect A2 → effect A3).
(2) Similarly, when the special destination determination effect is executed across a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays, the special destination determination effect having continuity in the content of the effect is executed. For example, when the preceding determination effect is executed over three symbol variation displays, the effect of each time is an effect having continuity (effect B1 → effect B2 → effect B3). Moreover, with regard to the content of the effect of the destination determination effect and the content of the effect of the special destination determination effect, the content of the continuity (for example, the content of the effect in which any of the effects A1, A2, and A3 and the effect B1 is continuous). It becomes.

  According to the present solution, when performing the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect across a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays, the effect is performed with the continuity of the contents of the effect, so there is a story and It is possible to execute a prefetch effect with a high effect. Thereby, the range of production can be expanded compared with the conventional simplified look-ahead production. In addition, since the total performance time is determined first, the continuous performance can be executed without a sense of incongruity even when a continuous performance with a story is executed. In addition, even when the special destination determination effect is executed after the predetermination effect, the continuity is imparted to the two effects, so that the advance mode of the prefetch effect can be made uncomfortable.

  Solving means 13: When the gaming machine of the present solving means executes the special destination determination effect subsequent to the destination determination effect in any of the solution means 1 to 12, the destination determination effect or the special destination determination effect An amusement machine, further comprising production content reorganization means for reorganizing at least part of the production content.

  Here, when the special destination determination effect is executed subsequent to the destination determination effect, it may be assumed that both effects do not mesh well depending on the progress of the destination determination effect. In such a case, if the special advance determination effect is forcibly executed after the advance determination effect, the story of the prefetch effect is interrupted and the effect may be diminished.

  Therefore, in such a case, at least a part of the effect contents of the destination determination effect or the special destination determination effect is reorganized. Although the part to be reorganized depends on the progress of the destination determination effect, for example, a part of the effect part of the special destination determination effect can be reorganized. As the contents of the reorganization, it is possible to continue the special destination determination effect without a sense of incongruity following the previous determination effect by replacing the effect that has already been performed with an effect that reinforces the effect, or by replacing it with an effect that introduces the effect to be performed in the future. Can be made.

  Solving means 14: The gaming machine of the present solving means in any one of the solving means 8 to 13, when the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means satisfies a predetermined reach occurrence condition, Reach effect execution means for executing a reach effect during execution of the variable display effect, and the one or more lottery elements stored before the specific lottery element and the specific lottery element by the first variation time matching means When the total variation time of the symbol that is variably displayed due to consumption is matched with the total performance time of the first determination effect, or the special lottery element and the special lottery element by the second variation time matching means The total effect of the special destination determination effect is the total change time of the symbols that are displayed variably by consuming one or more lottery elements stored before If it is matched, the destination determination effect executed by the destination determination effect execution means or the special destination determination effect execution means executed by the special destination determination effect execution means without executing the reach effect by the reach effect execution means. And a special success / failure effect executing means for executing a special success / failure effect indicating the result of the internal lottery.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) When a predetermined reach generation condition is satisfied, the reach effect is executed during the execution of the variable display effect.
(2) When the total variation time of the symbol that is variably displayed by consuming the specific lottery element and one or more lottery elements stored before the specific lottery element is matched with the total performance time, Alternatively, the total variation time of the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner by consuming one or more lottery elements stored before the special lottery element and the special lottery element matches the total performance time of the special destination determination effect Result (in other words, when the variation time of the change to be read-ahead is included in the total performance time), the result of the internal lottery during the execution of the pre-decision effect or the special pre-determination effect without executing the reach effect A special success / failure effect indicating is executed.

According to this solving means, when the fluctuation time of the change is included in the total effect time of the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect, the special success / failure effect is executed without executing the reach effect. For this reason, the result of the internal lottery becomes clear in the first determination effect and the special destination determination effect, unlike the conventional presentation method in which the reach effect is executed after the first determination effect and the special destination determination effect are completed. The new game can be demonstrated.
In addition, because the results of the internal lottery will be clear in the first determination effect and the special destination determination effect, the result of the internal lottery will be promptly communicated to the player, whether winning or not winning, and the game efficiency will be improved accordingly. Can do.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the prefetch effect is continued when the prefetch effect executable condition is satisfied while the prefetch effect is being executed, so that the predictability of the prefetch effect is avoided and the prefetch effect is avoided. The range of production by can be expanded.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a destination determination effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a procedure of a destination determination effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of special destination determination effect management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a procedure of a special destination determination effect management process. It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the prefetch effect selection table at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the prefetch effect selection table at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure column of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a big hit winning. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big prize opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an end process. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the outline | summary of the control processing at the time of performing a predetermination effect. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the outline | summary of the control processing at the time of performing a predetermination effect. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the outline | summary of the control processing at the time of performing the prior determination effect of a comparative example. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the outline | summary of the control processing at the time of performing a special destination determination effect following a destination determination effect. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the outline | summary of the control processing at the time of performing a special destination determination effect following a destination determination effect. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the correspondence of a game state and memory content. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the correspondence of a game state and memory content. It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuation figure showing the flow of reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning). It is a continuation figure which shows in part an example of a big-game effect performed during a big hit game in the case of “16 rounds probable big hit”. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect of fireworks mode. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 1st production of a first judgment production partially (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 1st production of a first judgment production partially (2/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the 1st production example of a first judgment production partially (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 1st production of a first judgment production partially (4/4). It is a continuation figure which shows a part of the 2nd production example of a first judgment production partially (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the 2nd production example of a tip judgment production partially (2/2). It is a continuation figure which shows a part of the 1st production example of special tip judgment production partially (1/2). FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing a first effect example of a special destination determination effect (2/2). It is a continuation figure showing partially the 2nd production example of special tip judgment production (1/3). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the 2nd production example of special tip judgment production (2/3). It is a continuation figure showing partially the 2nd production example of special tip judgment production (3/3). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a destination determination effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special destination determination effect setting process.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. The overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame assembly 2, a glass frame unit 4, a tray unit 6 and a plastic frame assembly 7 (game machine frame) as its main body. Among these, the outer frame assembly 2 is a structure in which wood is combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame assembly 2 uses fasteners such as screws for island facilities (not shown) in the game hall. Are fixed.

  The other glass frame unit 4, tray unit 6, and plastic frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame assembly 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the right edge (left edge in FIG. 2) of the plastic frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, the glass frame unit 4 and the right edge (back side) of the outer frame assembly 2 are each provided with a locking tool (not shown). As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame assembly 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of a game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates to open the glass frame unit 4 and the tray unit 6 together with the plastic frame assembly 7. It becomes a state. When these are entirely opened from the outer frame assembly 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the glass frame unit 4 is unlocked while the plastic frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the glass frame unit 4 can be opened. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board 8 is exposed directly, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened, the lock mechanism (not shown) of the tray unit 6 is exposed. If the lock mechanism is released in this state, the tray unit 6 can be opened to the front side with respect to the plastic frame assembly 7.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes a game board 8 as a game unit. The game board 8 is supported by the plastic frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the glass frame unit 4. The game board 8 can be attached to and detached from the plastic frame assembly 7 with the glass frame unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The glass frame unit 4 has a vertically oval window 4a formed at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. For example, the glass unit is a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the glass frame unit 4 in an openable / closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the glass frame unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the game board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape projecting from the outer frame assembly 2 to the front side as a whole, and an upper dish 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at the lower position of the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separately received from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6b or lower pan 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  In addition, an upper dish ball removal lever 6d is installed on the front surface of the tray unit 6 in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal button 6e in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by sliding the upper plate ball removing lever 6d leftward, for example. Further, the player can, for example, push down the lower dish ball removal button 6e to drop the game balls stored in the lower dish 6c downward and discharge them. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6. The player operates the grip unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises along the left side edge of the game board 8, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill.

[Configuration of the board]
In the game area 8a, a starting gate 20, normal winning ports 22, 24, an upper starting winning port 26, a variable starting winning device 28, a variable winning device 30, and the like are installed. The game balls thrown into the game area 8a randomly pass through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, or the normal winning ports 22, 24, the upper starting winning port 26, and the variable starting winning device during operation. Win 28 (enter a ball). The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the winning game balls are collected to the back side of the game board 8 through through holes formed in the game board.

  The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner), and accordingly, the lower start winning port 28a can be awarded. (Ordinary electric appliance). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right movable pieces 28b, and these movable pieces 28b reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown in the figure, the left and right movable pieces 28b are in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, winning to the lower start winning opening 28a is impossible (a state in which there is no gap through which game balls can flow). ing. On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the left and right movable pieces 28b are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width of the lower start winning port 28a is expanded to the left and right. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which a game ball can flow in, and generates a win to the lower start winning port 28a. Note that the arrangement (gauge) of the obstacle nails installed on the game board 8 is basically a mode in which it is easy to guide the flow of the game balls toward the variable start winning device 28, but the game balls are always variable. The inflow does not necessarily flow into the start winning device 28, but the inflow occurs only at random.

  In addition, the above variable winning device 30 operates when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning), and can be awarded to a big winning opening (no reference sign). (Special electric equipment, special winning event generation means). The variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a, and this opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, winning in the big winning opening is always impossible (the big winning opening is closed). When the variable winning device 30 is operated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall forward with its lower end edge as a hinge, thereby opening the large winning opening (open state). During this time, the variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not impossible, and can generate an event of winning a prize winning opening. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball to the special winning opening.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board 8. In addition, all game balls that have been driven into the game area 8 a including the game balls won in the upper start winning opening 26, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30 are collected to the back side of the game board 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  The game board 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, for example, at the lower right position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, A first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided (normal symbol display means, special symbol display means, lottery element storage means). Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs).

  FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board 8 (lower right position in the window 4a). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display the variation state and stop state of the special symbol by, for example, 7 segment LEDs (with dots), respectively (symbol display means).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, 0 stored number is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is turned on, 1 stored number is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is changed to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing that a winning is generated each time a game ball flows into the upper start winning opening 26. (Up to a maximum of four), every time the change of the special symbol is started with the winning, the display mode is changed by one by one. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is displayed after being incremented by one in the sense of memorizing that a winning occurs every time a game ball flows into the variable starting winning device 28 (lower starting winning port). It changes to the mode (up to 4), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the winning as a trigger, it changes to the display mode after decreasing by one. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol is already in the upper start winning opening 26 in a state where the first special symbol can start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball flows in, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the variable start winning device 28 (lower start winning port) in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball flows in, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of winnings that have not yet started to change in the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Represents.

  The game state display device 38 includes four LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, a probability variation state display lamp 38c, and a short time state display lamp 38d. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol described above. The operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are attached to the game board 8 in a state where they are mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configuration of the game board: see FIG. 1]
The game board 8 is provided with a production unit 40 from the center position to the right side. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inner side. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board 8 by the three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light using, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. As described above, the game board 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface (design of a cell plate (not shown)) and the decoration of the effect unit 40.

  A ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40f is formed at the center of the rolling stage 40e. At this time, the game ball that has flowed down from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40f easily flows into the upper start winning opening 26 just below the ball discharge path 40f. Become.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the interior of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40g (for example, a heart-shaped ornament). The effect movable body 40g can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to the effects using these movable bodies 40g, it is possible to demonstrate appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images. A production example using the movable body 40g will be described later.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
In the glass frame unit 4, glass frame top lamps 46 and 48 and glass frame side lamps 50 are installed at a plurality of locations so as to surround the glass unit 8 as components for production. In addition, a tray lamp 52 is installed in the tray unit 6, and the tray lamp 52, the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, and the glass frame side lamp 50 are integrally connected on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 in appearance. Designed as if it were.

  The various lamps 46 to 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like) of built-in LEDs. In addition, a pair of left and right glass frame speakers 54 and a glass frame middle speaker 55 are built in the upper part of the glass frame unit 4, and a saucer speaker 56 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 6 c in the saucer unit 6. Built in. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper tray 6b. The player operates the effect switching button 45 to switch the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, during the big hit confirmation display, or during the big hit game It is possible to generate some effects (various notice effects, probable promotion effects, etc.).

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. The electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 4).

  The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference sign), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the plastic frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is an interface for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). From the external terminal board 160, the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved. Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. Yes.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (RWM) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). ) This is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as 76 are integrated. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The game board 8 is provided with an upper start winning port switch 80, a lower start winning port switch 82, and a count switch 84 corresponding to the upper start winning port 26, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30, respectively. . Each start winning port switch 80, 82 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the upper start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (lower start winning port 28a). The count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 30 (large winning opening) and counting the number. Similarly, the game board 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the normal winning openings 22 and 24. Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is given as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, a winning of a game ball for the normal winning ports 22, 24 located on the left side of the board surface is detected, and in the right winning port switch 86, a winning of a game ball in the normal winning port 24 located on the right side of the board surface is detected. Also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the count switch 84, and the winning opening switch 86 are transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 87, and are sent to the panel relay terminal plate 87. , Wiring patterns and connection terminals for relaying the respective winning detection signals are provided.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed on the game board 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the substrate 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87.

  Further, the game board 8 is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a big prize opening solenoid 90 corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. These solenoids 88 and 90 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 to open and close (activate) the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 respectively. The solenoids 88 and 90 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and when the plastic frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame assembly 2. The contact point signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 or the plastic frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door opening information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is equipped (special privilege grant means). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. When the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the firing control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Moreover, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8 as described above. The game ball is emitted at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. . In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). The lending / return switch board 123 has switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12, respectively. When the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended and It is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 120. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. If no valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display device to display a demonstration (of the valuable medium). (Display for prompting input) can also be performed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp driving circuit 132 and an acoustic driving circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or a process of actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. Note that the communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the saucer lamp 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, or the like. Here, although the example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given, a saucer illuminated board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is interposed via the saucer illuminated board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output.

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame decoration board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame decoration board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Further, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Is done. In addition, although the example which connected the production | presentation switch button 45 to the glass-frame decoration board 136 is given here, when installing said saucer illumination board, the production switch button 45 is connected to the saucer illumination board. Also good.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board 8, and a movable body solenoid 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body solenoid 57 drives the movable body 40g via a link mechanism (not shown), for example. The driving signal from the lamp driving circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body solenoid 57 via the panel electric decoration board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Furthermore, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and production control by image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time) on the VRAM 156, and individually handles each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data. To drive.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 164 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  5 and 6 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: The main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the occurrence of the previous power interruption.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. The main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 6 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the big prize opening solenoid 90, etc., and the entire area excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76. Is backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) and various random numbers excluding hit determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range by another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 8). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 8), and therefore overlap (conflict) ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms) ( For example, it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 8). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: The main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70). Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 5).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, an input state (ON / OFF) of a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and a winning detection signal from the upper starting winning port switch 80, the lower starting winning port switch 82, the count switch 84, and the winning port switch 86. Lead.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the upper start winning opening switch 80, and the lower starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the upper start winning opening switch 80 or the lower starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. When the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. The processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the upper start winning port switch 80 or the lower starting winning port switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. (2) The variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is controlled according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To do. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction command for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls is issued. Output.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display device) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is output. Can provide various jackpot information (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently jackpot. Or for each table, it can be recognized whether or not the current symbol variation time is in a shortened state. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: The main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs the drive signals, test signals, and the like of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special prize opening solenoid 90 stored in the port output request buffer together.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processings are executed by being incorporated in the main loop of the CPU. There is also a programming example.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 8). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the upper start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol (the first event is generated). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (second event occurs) from the lower start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 corresponding to the big winning opening. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes a large winning mouth count process. In the big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 30 every round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operating memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 8).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 9). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each section contains a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol random number. Each can be stored as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the upper limit (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 9). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 8).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition means) ). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. When the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is in operation of the time reduction function or whether it is a big hit. If the time reduction function is not in operation other than the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the time reduction function is in operation or is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit. Also, except during the big hit, when both the working memory of the first special symbol and the working memory of the second special symbol remain, the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol (the second special symbol of the second special symbol) This is because the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency particularly during the operation of the time shortening function. In addition, while the time shortening function is activated, the special symbol variation time is shortened, and the normal symbol winning probability is high (for example, low probability is about 25/251 → about 249/251), and In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, about 10 seconds when not in operation → about 1 second) and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended (for example, about 0.3 seconds when not in operation → 2 .5 seconds), and the number of times of release increases (for example, increases from 1 to 2 when not in operation), so that the game ball can be fired for a long time (all memory of normal symbols is interrupted and variable) As long as the change of the second special symbol is prioritized, the operation memory is less likely to be interrupted (so-called electric chew support) unless the start winning device 28 is interrupted for a period of time until the operation is stopped. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined (fluctuated) in the order in which the prizes are generated, without providing a priority order. Note that step S36 may be divided into two steps, for example, step S36a for determining “time reduction function in operation” and step S36b for determining “big hit”.

  Step S37: When the time shortening function is not activated (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 9).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 9). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 9). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 10), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 8) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 10) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 10) described above.

  Step S44: The main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). The acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 10) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 10) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. Here, it is determined only in the previous step S45a whether or not the big hit is made, and the operating state of the time reduction function is not determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the game other than the big hit, the first special In order to change the second special symbol over the symbol, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance for the second special symbol, regardless of the operating state of the time reduction function, except during the big hit, and the result is pre-readed. This is because it can be used. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is an operating memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 9).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 10 and step S46 in FIG. 11) (predetermined determination). Execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when winning the upper start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when winning the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 10) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 11). .

  Step S54: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determining means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the “time reduction function” is activated is reflected. For example, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “out-of-reach fluctuation fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “short-time / non-shortening fluctuation time”. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “short / mid-shortening fluctuation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is inactive (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “normally out of reach reach fluctuation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally deviation reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a change pattern destination determination command for the change pattern at the time of small hit, similarly to the above-described process at the time of loss.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 completes the acquisition effect determination process after executing the destination determination effect management process in step S82 and the special destination determination effect management process in step S84, and stores the first special symbol memory of the caller. The process returns to the update process (FIG. 10) or the second special symbol storage update process (FIG. 11). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, if the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to “probability variation”, for example, the probability state schedule flag “A0H” is set. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). The value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The comparative value for low probability is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No). Next, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the winning value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described deviation pattern information prior determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 10) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 11). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 described above, and it is determined from the result whether the jackpot type corresponds to “non-probable variation (normal) symbol” or “probability variation symbol”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “non-probable change (normal) symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents “probability variation symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. As the special symbol destination determination value, for example, “01H” is set when it corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probable variation”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule (No Then, step S64 is executed to set a comparative value for high probability.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  Step S82: After executing either the big hit hour variation pattern information prior determination process in step S79 or the loss variation pattern information prior determination process in step S80, the main control CPU 72 executes a first determination effect management process. . The destination determination effect management process is a process for managing whether or not to execute the destination determination effect on the main control device side. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S84: After executing the destination determination effect management process in step S82, the main control CPU 72 executes the special destination determination effect management process. The special destination determination effect management process is a process for managing whether or not the special destination determination effect is executed on the main control device side. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 10) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11).

[Prior determination production management process (1)]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the destination determination effect management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure. Note that two methods can be employed for the pre-decision effect management process.

The first method is a method of selecting a special variation pattern by rewriting a variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) when it is determined to execute the first determination effect.
The second method is a method for forcibly selecting a special variation pattern without rewriting the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) even when it is determined to execute the first determination effect.

And, no matter which method is adopted, the special variation pattern will be selected in the end, so the total variation time of the special symbol that will be variably displayed from now on should be matched with the total performance time of the first determination effect (First variation time matching means).
Here, the first method will be described first.

  Step S90: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not to execute the first determination effect. In the present embodiment, when all of the conditions listed below are satisfied, it is determined that the predetermination effect is executed as if a specific condition is satisfied.

(1) A lottery element corresponding to non-winning exists before a specific lottery element (variation).
This is because, if the lottery element corresponding to the win is stored before the change to be prefetched, the big hit game is executed before the change, so the continuity of the prefetching effect is Because it will be lost.
(2) A specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a reach effect is executed) is to be selected for a specific lottery element.
This is because the pre-determination effect is not executed for all variation patterns because the pre-determination effect is an effect that suggests the reliability for the big hit.
(3) Winning a predetermined performance execution lottery.
This is because even if a specific variation pattern is selected, the predetermination effect is not always executed, but the predetermination effect is executed only in a fixed case. In addition, when the lottery element to be prefetched corresponds to winning, the effect lottery may be won with higher probability than in the case where it corresponds to non-winning.

  If all the above three conditions are satisfied (step S90: Yes), the main control CPU 72 determines that the first determination effect is to be executed, and then executes step S91. On the other hand, when there is a condition that does not satisfy any one of the above three conditions (step S90: No), the main control CPU 72 determines that the first determination effect is not executed, and at the time of acquisition. Returning to the effect determination process (FIG. 12).

  Step S91: The main control CPU 72 executes a prefetch effect lottery. Specifically, it determines which prefetch effect is to be executed from among a plurality of prefetch effects prepared. Since each pre-reading effect has a predetermined scale, it is possible to determine the total effect time of the pre-determination effect by determining which pre-reading effect is to be executed (first total effect time determining means). ).

  Step S92: The main control CPU 72 executes a storage number confirmation process. Specifically, a process of confirming how many working memories that are currently unchanged is stored. In the present embodiment, since it is assumed that the destination determination effect is executed using the working memory corresponding to the first special symbol, the maximum value of the stored number is “4”. However, when the stored number is “4”, the lottery element is not stored any further, and therefore, it is not a determination target for the pre-reading effect. In addition, when the number of memories is “0”, only a single prefetch effect can be executed instead of a continuous prefetch effect. Therefore, when the number of memories is “0”, the prefetch effect is not executed. It may be.

  Step S93: The main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern determination random number rewriting process. Specifically, the variation pattern determination element corresponding to the lottery element stored before the specific lottery element determined to execute the first determination effect is rewritten. Thereby, a special variation pattern can be selected in a variation pattern determination process to be executed later. Depending on the pre-reading effect selected, the variation pattern determination element corresponding to a specific lottery element may be rewritten (this will be described later). By executing this process, a specific variation pattern is selected before the variation or for the variation pattern including the variation.

Step S94: The main control CPU 72 generates a destination determination information command. The destination determination information command includes information on the total presentation time of the destination determination effect and information on how many times the symbol variation display is used to execute the destination determination effect. Details of the destination determination information command will be described later. The generated destination determination information command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (first destination determination information notifying means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 12).

  In this way, when the first method is adopted, the change pattern selected at the start of change can be changed to a special change pattern with a simple control process that simply rewrites the change pattern determination element (change pattern determination random number). Therefore, the control process can be simplified.

[Prior determination production management process (2)]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the procedure of the destination determination effect management process. In the example of the above-described first determination effect management process (1), control is performed so as to rewrite the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number). However, the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) is not rewritten. Control may be performed so that the special variation pattern is forcibly selected. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  The main control CPU 72 executes processing from step S90 to step S92. In addition, about the processing content of step S90-step S92, it is the same as that of the content demonstrated by the previous destination determination effect management process (1).

  Step S95: The main control CPU 72 executes a pre-determination effect status setting process. Specifically, a process of updating the value of the destination determination effect status stored in the RAM 76 is executed. Here, the predetermination effect status is a variable for storing the content of the predetermination effect, and stores the same content as the previous determination information command described above. The main control CPU 72 can confirm which type of the destination determination effect is to be executed by using how many lottery elements by checking the destination determination effect status.

Step S94: The main control CPU 72 generates a destination determination information command. The specific processing content is the same as the content described in the previous determination effect management processing (1).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 12).

  In this way, when the second method is adopted, the process of rewriting the fluctuation pattern determining element (fluctuation pattern determining random number) becomes unnecessary, and therefore, control effective when there is a situation where the fluctuation pattern determining element cannot be rewritten. It becomes processing.

[Special destination judgment effect management process (1)]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of special destination determination effect management processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure. As for the special destination determination effect management process, two methods can be adopted in the same way as the above-described destination determination effect management process.

The first method is a method of selecting a special variation pattern by rewriting a variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) when it is determined to execute a special destination determination effect.
The second method is a method for forcibly selecting a special variation pattern without rewriting the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) even when it is determined to execute the special destination determination effect. .

Then, regardless of which method is used, the special variation pattern will be selected in the end, so the total variation time of the special symbol that will be variably displayed will match the total performance time of the special destination determination effect. (Second variation time matching means).
Here, the first method will be described first.

  Step S150: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not to execute a special destination determination effect. In the present embodiment, when all of the conditions listed below are satisfied, it is determined that the special destination determination effect is executed assuming that the special conditions are satisfied.

(1) There must be a lottery element corresponding to non-winning before a special lottery element (variation).
This is because, if the lottery element corresponding to the win is stored before the change to be prefetched, the big hit game is executed before the change, so the continuity of the prefetching effect is Because it will be lost.
(2) A specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a reach effect is executed) is to be selected for a special lottery element.
This is because the special destination determination effect is an effect that suggests reliability for the big hit, and therefore the special destination determination effect is not executed for all the variation patterns.

(3) Winning a predetermined performance execution lottery.
This is because even if a specific variation pattern is selected, the special destination determination effect is not always executed, but the special destination determination effect is executed only in a fixed case. In addition, when the lottery element to be prefetched corresponds to winning, the effect lottery may be won with higher probability than in the case where it corresponds to non-winning.
(4) The destination determination effect is being executed.
This is because the special destination determination effect is executed after the destination determination effect. If the destination determination effect is not executed, the destination determination effect may be executed again.

  If all the above four conditions are satisfied (step S150: Yes), the main control CPU 72 determines that the special destination determination effect is to be executed, and then executes step S151. On the other hand, when there is a condition that does not satisfy any one of the above four conditions (step S150: No), the main control CPU 72 determines that the special destination determination effect is not executed, and acquires it. Return to the time effect determination process (FIG. 12).

[Variations of conditions]
The above four conditions are preferable conditions, and the contents of the above conditions can be changed as appropriate according to the game specifications, or the above conditions can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

  For example, regarding the condition of (2) above, “the variation pattern corresponding to the winning will be selected for a special lottery element” may be selected. In this way, the special destination determination effect is an effect that is executed when a lottery element corresponding to the winning is stored, and thus it can be an effect with a sense of security with respect to the big hit.

  As for the condition (2) above, “there is a lottery element storage when the special symbol start condition is satisfied, regardless of the determination result in advance for any special lottery element. It may be “what you are doing”. In this way, as long as the lottery element storage (holding) exists, the special destination determination effect continues to be executed, so the player is motivated not to interrupt the lottery element storage, The operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Furthermore, regarding the condition (4) above, “the destination determination effect or the special destination determination effect is being executed” may be used. In this way, the special destination determination effect is executed again not only during the execution of the destination determination effect but also during the execution of the special destination determination effect. For this reason, if the special pre-determination effect is executed after the pre-determination effect, the pre-reading effect is not ended, and the special pre-determination effect may be executed again after the special pre-determination effect. A new playability that can be continued forever can be exhibited.

  Step S151: The main control CPU 72 executes a prefetch effect lottery. Specifically, it determines which prefetch effect is to be executed from among a plurality of prefetch effects prepared. Since each pre-reading effect has a pre-determined scale, it is possible to determine the total effect time of the special pre-determination effect by determining which pre-read effect is executed (second total effect time determination) means).

  Step S152: The main control CPU 72 executes a storage number confirmation process. Specifically, a process of confirming how many working memories that are currently unchanged is stored. In the present embodiment, since it is assumed that the special destination determination effect is executed using the working memory corresponding to the first special symbol, the maximum value of the stored number is “4”. However, when the stored number is “4”, the lottery element is not stored any further, and therefore, it is not a determination target for the pre-reading effect. In addition, when the number of memories is “0”, only a single prefetch effect can be executed instead of a continuous prefetch effect. Therefore, when the number of memories is “0”, the prefetch effect is not executed. It may be.

  Step S153: The main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern determination random number rewriting process. Specifically, the variation pattern determination element corresponding to the lottery element stored before the special lottery element determined to execute the special destination determination effect is rewritten. Thereby, a special variation pattern can be selected in a variation pattern determination process to be executed later. Depending on the pre-reading effect selected, the variation pattern determining element corresponding to the special lottery element may be rewritten (this will also be described later). By executing this process, a specific variation pattern is selected before the variation or for the variation pattern including the variation.

Step S154: The main control CPU 72 generates a special destination determination information command. The special destination determination information command includes information on the total effect time of the special destination determination effect and information on how many times the symbol variation display is used to execute the destination determination effect. Details of the special destination determination information command will be described later. The generated special destination determination information command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (second destination determination information notifying means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 12).

  In this way, when the first method is adopted, the change pattern selected at the start of change can be changed to a special change pattern with a simple control process that simply rewrites the change pattern determination element (change pattern determination random number). Therefore, the control process can be simplified.

[Special destination determination effect management process (2)]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating another procedure example of the special destination determination effect management process. In the example of the special destination determination effect management process (1) described above, control is performed so as to rewrite the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number), but the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) is not rewritten. Alternatively, control may be performed so that the special variation pattern is forcibly selected. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  The main control CPU 72 executes processing from step S150 to step S152. In addition, about the process content of step S150-step S152, it is the same as that of the content demonstrated by the previous special destination determination effect management process (1).

  Step S155: The main control CPU 72 executes special destination determination effect status setting processing. Specifically, processing for updating the value of the special destination determination effect status stored in the RAM 76 is executed. Here, the special destination determination effect status is a variable for storing the content of the special destination determination effect, and stores the same content as the special destination determination information command described above. The main control CPU 72 can confirm which kind of prefetching effect is to be executed using how many lottery elements by confirming the special predetermination effect status.

Step S154: The main control CPU 72 generates a special destination determination information command. The specific processing content is the same as the content described in the special destination determination effect management processing (1).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 12).

  In this way, when the second method is adopted, the process of rewriting the fluctuation pattern determining element (fluctuation pattern determining random number) becomes unnecessary, and therefore, control effective when there is a situation where the fluctuation pattern determining element cannot be rewritten. It becomes processing.

[Prefetching effect selection table when winning]
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration column of a winning prefetch effect selection table. The main control CPU 72 refers to this table to determine the type of prefetch effect when the previous determination result corresponds to winning. These tables are used in steps S91 and S92 of the destination determination management process and steps S151 and S152 of the special destination determination management process.

  In the pre-reading effect selection table at the time of winning, the left column indicates the distribution value for each pre-reading effect, and each of the distribution values “10”, “15”, “25”, “10”, “15”, “ "25" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. In the second column from the left, “prefetch effect A”, “prefetch effect B”, “prefetch effect C”, “prefetch effect D”, “prefetch effect E”, “prefetch effect” corresponding to each distribution value. F "is shown. That is, as a pre-reading effect at the time of winning, the rate at which “prefetching effect A” is selected is 10/100 (= 10%), and the rate at which “prefetching effect B” is selected is 15/100 (= 15). %). In addition, the rate at which “prefetch effect C” is selected is 25/100 (= 25%), and the rate at which “prefetch effect D” is selected is 10/100 (= 10%). Further, the ratio of selecting “prefetching effect E” is 15/100 (= 15%), and the ratio of selecting “prefetching effect F” is 25/100 (= 25%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to a selection ratio of six types of prefetch effects.

  In any case, when the prior determination result corresponds to winning, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on a predetermined random number, and selectively determines the content of the pre-reading effect at the selection ratio shown in this table.

  In the pre-reading effect selection table at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left, the total effect time of the pre-reading effect is defined. Specifically, the total effect time of “prefetch effect A” is “30 seconds”, and the total effect time of “prefetch effect B” is “60 seconds”. The total effect time of “prefetch effect C” is “90 seconds”, and the total effect time of “prefetch effect D” is “30 seconds”. The total effect time of “prefetch effect E” is “60 seconds”, and the total effect time of “prefetch effect F” is “90 seconds”. In addition, since the above-described pre-determination effect and special pre-determination effect are a kind of pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effects A to F are selected both when executing the pre-determination effect and when executing the special pre-determination effect. It can be done.

  In this embodiment, six types of pre-reading effects are prepared at the time of winning, but these can be broadly classified into two. The first classification is a case where a prefetch effect is executed without changing the variation pattern of the change, and “prefetch effect A”, “prefetch effect B”, and “prefetch effect C” are applicable. On the other hand, another classification is a case where the change pattern of the change is also changed to execute a prefetch effect, which corresponds to “prefetch effect D”, “prefetch effect E”, and “prefetch effect F”.

  In the winning pre-reading effect selection table, as shown in the two columns on the right side, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a pre-determination information command and a special pre-determination information command. The destination determination information command and the special destination determination information command are described by, for example, a 4-digit hexadecimal data value. Of these, the upper 4 bits are the command type of the destination determination information command or the special destination determination information command. In the case of the destination determination information command, a value of “0” is set, and in the case of the special destination determination information command, a value of “1” is set. The next 4 bits indicate whether the command is a winning command or a non-winning command. If the command is a winning command, a value of “1” is set. If the command is a non-winning command, “0” is set. The value of is set.

The next 4 bits represent the content of the pre-reading effect to be selected. A value of “A” is set for “pre-reading effect A”, and a value of “B” is set for “pre-reading effect B”. Is done.
The lower 4 bits represent the current memory number. If the memory number is “1”, the value “1” is set. If the memory number is “2”, the value “2” is set. The

For this reason, for example, if the current prefetching is the one at the time of winning, “prefetching effect A” is selected as the predetermination effect, and the stored number is “1”, the predetermination information command is described as “01A1H”. It will be.
In addition, if the prefetching of this time is the one at the time of winning, “prefetching effect A” is selected as the special predetermination effect, and the number of memories is “1”, the special predetermination information command is described as “11A1H”. It will be.

  As described above, when one of the prefetch effects is selected from the winning prefetch effect selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a predetermination information command and a special predetermination information command at that time (step S94 of the predetermination management process). Step S154) of the special destination determination management process. The generated destination determination information command and special destination determination information command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above.

[Look-ahead effect selection table at the time of loss]
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the off-prefetch effect selection table. When the previous determination result corresponds to non-winning, the main control CPU 72 refers to this table and determines the type of prefetch effect. These tables are used in step S91 and step S92 of the destination determination management process and in step 151 and step S152 of the destination determination management process.

  In the off-reading prefetch effect selection table, the left column indicates the distribution value for each prefetch effect, and each of the distribution values “35”, “10”, “5”, “35”, “10”, “ “5” corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. In the second column from the left, “prefetch effect A”, “prefetch effect B”, “prefetch effect C”, “prefetch effect D”, “prefetch effect E”, “prefetch effect” corresponding to each distribution value. F "is shown. That is, as a pre-reading effect at the time of winning, the rate of selecting “pre-reading effect A” is 35/100 (= 35%), and the rate of selecting “pre-reading effect B” is 10/100 (= 10). %). Further, the ratio of selecting “prefetch effect C” is 5/100 (= 5%), and the ratio of selecting “prefetch effect D” is 35/100 (= 35%). In addition, the rate at which “prefetch effect E” is selected is 10/100 (= 10%), and the rate at which “prefetch effect F” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to a selection ratio of six types of prefetch effects.

  In any case, when the previous determination result corresponds to non-winning, the main control CPU 72 performs selection lottery based on a predetermined random number, and selectively determines the content of the pre-reading effect at the selection ratio shown in this table. .

  Further, the total effect time of the prefetch effect is defined in the out-of-order prefetch effect selection table as shown in the third column from the left. Specifically, the total effect time of “prefetch effect A” is “30 seconds”, and the total effect time of “prefetch effect B” is “60 seconds”. The total effect time of “prefetch effect C” is “90 seconds”, and the total effect time of “prefetch effect D” is “30 seconds”. The total effect time of “prefetch effect E” is “60 seconds”, and the total effect time of “prefetch effect F” is “90 seconds”. In addition, since the above-described pre-determination effect and special pre-determination effect are a kind of pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effects A to F are selected both when executing the pre-determination effect and when executing the special pre-determination effect. It can be done.

  In the present embodiment, six types of pre-reading effects are prepared in the case of non-winning as well as in the case of winning, but these can be broadly classified into two. The first classification is a case where a prefetch effect is executed without changing the variation pattern of the change, and “prefetch effect A”, “prefetch effect B”, and “prefetch effect C” are applicable. On the other hand, another classification is a case where the change pattern of the change is also changed to execute a prefetch effect, which corresponds to “prefetch effect D”, “prefetch effect E”, and “prefetch effect F”.

Further, in the loss prefetch effect selection table, as shown in the two columns on the right side, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a predetermination information command or a special destination determination information command.
For this reason, for example, if the current prefetching is a non-winning selection and “prefetching effect A” is selected as the predetermination effect and the stored number is “1”, the predetermination information command is described as “00A1H”. Will be.
In addition, if the prefetching of this time is a non-winning selection, “prefetching effect A” is selected as the special predetermination effect, and the stored number is “1”, the special predetermination information command is described as “10A1H”. Will be.

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects any prefetch effect from the prefetch effect selection table at the time of loss, it generates a predetermination information command or a special predetermination information command at that time (step S94 of the predetermination management process). , Step S154) of the special destination determination management process. The generated destination determination information command and special destination determination information command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above.

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 8) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a variable winning device management process. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of (Step S5000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode (a mode other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a 16-round big hit mode, an opportunity to shift from a normal state until then to a big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until 9 winnings are counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times, 16 times), As a result, the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In the meantime, by allowing the variable winning device 30 to win the game balls intensively, the player is given an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game execution means). Note that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of the big win is referred to as “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 16 times, these may be collectively referred to as “16 rounds”. In the present embodiment, not only 16 round jackpots but also a plurality of types of 10 round jackpots are provided as jackpot types. In addition, for 16 round big hits and 10 round big hits, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided therein.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 for one round. Each time it is finished, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). In the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended. As a result, the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for the above-mentioned “16 round jackpot”, for example, (1) “16 round probability variable jackpot” and (2) “16 round normal (non-probability) jackpot” are provided as a plurality of winning types (this) There may be more). In addition to these “16 round jackpots”, in this embodiment, (3) “10 rounds probable big hit” and (4) “10 round normal (non-probable) big wins” are provided as a plurality of winning types ( There may be more).

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “16 round probability variation jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol”, and “16 round normal jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round regular symbol”. Further, “10 round probability variation jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “10 round probability variation symbol”, and “10 round normal symbol jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “10 round regular symbol bonus”. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[16 round normal design]
First, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “16 round normal symbol” mode in the above special symbol stop display processing, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (first special symbol). Game execution means). In this case, the special winning opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the 16th round. For this reason, the “16-round normal symbol” jackpot game gives 16 rounds of award (prize balls) to the player. Note that when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the special winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. In this case, since the “probability changing function” is not activated, the privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is not given to the player. However, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the end of the big hit game, there is a privilege to shift to the “variable time reduction state”. It is given to the player.

[16 rounds probable design]
Alternatively, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “16-round probability variation symbol” mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (first special game) Execution means). In this case, the special winning opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the 16th round. Each of these “16-round probable symbols” jackpot games also gives the player 16 balls (prize balls) for 16 rounds. Further, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the big winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the big hit game is finished, the “variable time reduction state” is also achieved. A privilege to be transferred is given to the player.

[10 round normal design]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “10 round normal symbols”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (second special game execution) means). In this case, the winning opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. For this reason, in the “10 round normal symbol” jackpot game, 10 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. Note that when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the special winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. In this case, since the “probability changing function” is not activated, the privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is not given to the player. However, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the end of the big hit game, there is a privilege to shift to the “variable time reduction state”. It is given to the player.

[10-round probable design]
Alternatively, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “10-round probability variation symbol” mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (second special game) Execution means). In this case, the winning opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. Each of these “10-round probable symbols” jackpot games also gives the player 10 balls (prize balls) for 10 rounds. Further, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the big winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the big hit game is finished, the “variable time reduction state” is also achieved. A privilege to be transferred is given to the player.

  In any case, if the winning symbol falls under any of the above “16-round probability variation symbol” or “10-round probability variation symbol”, the player is given a privilege to shift the internal state to the “high probability state” after the big hit game ends. Is granted. In addition, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and the winning symbol at that time corresponds to either “16 round probability variation symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol”, the “high probability state” will be maintained even after the jackpot game ends. Is continued (resumed). On the other hand, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and falls into either of the above “16 round normal symbol” or “10 round normal symbol”, the internal state will be the normal probability state (low probability state) after the big hit game ends. Return to). Needless to say, if the internal lottery is won in the normal probability state and falls into either “16 round normal symbol” or “10 round normal symbol”, the internal state is maintained in the normal probability state even after the big hit game ends.

[Small hits]
In the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small winning game, a small winning game is performed separately from the big winning game, and the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed. That is, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit state in the previous special symbol stop display processing, the game (variable winning a prize) in the normal probability state or the high probability state. A game in which the device 30 operates) is executed. In such a small win game, the variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but hardly wins a big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability change function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so it goes to the “high probability state” or “time reduction state”. The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the game of that small hit, and even if you win a small hit in the “time reduction state” The “time reduction state” does not end after the end of the small hit game (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and after the subtraction Is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 8). . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. That is, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the variable winning device 30 as in the case of “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the central bar). It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the “−”) lighting display. In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). Even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is shortened based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 seconds The number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → 2.5 seconds). Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of the deviation variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table to be used at the time of a loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means, varying time defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “243”, “246”, “247”, “ 248 ”,“ 249 ”,“ 250 ”,“ 251 ”,“ 252 ”,“ 253 ”,“ 254 ”,“ 255 (FFH) ”are provided, and“ variation ”with respect to each“ comparison value ” “1” to “17” of “pattern number” are assigned.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Further, the variation pattern numbers “9” to “17” correspond to the special deviation variation patterns. The special off-set fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern used when the above-described prefetch effect is executed. Note that such a variation pattern selection table is also used in the prior determination process of the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 12) (the same applies to the big hit).

Here, the fluctuation time of the special deviation fluctuation pattern is set as follows, and the fluctuation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.
Change pattern number “9”: Change time 7.5 seconds Change pattern number “10”: Change time 10.0 seconds Change pattern number “11”: Change time 15.0 seconds Change pattern number “12”: Change time 20. 0 seconds Fluctuation pattern number “13”: Fluctuation time 22.5 seconds Fluctuation pattern number “14”: Fluctuation time 30.0 seconds Fluctuation pattern number “15”: Fluctuation time 45.0 seconds Fluctuation pattern number “16”: Fluctuation time 60.0 seconds Fluctuation pattern number “17”: Variation time 90.0 seconds

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

  Here, when the first method for selecting the special variation pattern by rewriting the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) is adopted, the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) is changed from “247” to “255”. The main control CPU 72 selects any one of “9” to “17” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) is not rewritten and the value of the destination determination effect status or the special destination determination effect status is set, the variation pattern determination random number value is not rewritten. In that case, a corresponding variation pattern (any one of variation pattern numbers “9” to “17”) is selected with reference to the value of the destination determination effect status or the special destination determination effect status.

  Even when the pre-reading effect is not executed, a special deviation variation pattern may be selected depending on the value of the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number). In this case, a non-reach fluctuation pattern can be used according to the fluctuation time of the special deviation fluctuation pattern, or a deviation fluctuation pattern can be obtained after the reach.

[See Fig. 20: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, there are four types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The four types of breakdown are “10 round normal symbol”, “16 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, and “16 round probability variable symbol”. Note that each of the four types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round normal symbol 1”, “10 round normal symbol 2”, “10 round normal symbol 3”, and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) shown in FIG. decide.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value “25”, “5”, “60”, “10” is the denominator. Is equivalent to the ratio when 100 is 100. In the second column from the left, “10 round normal symbol”, “16 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, and “16 round probability variable symbol” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of “10 round normal symbol” being selected is 25/100 (= 25%), and the proportion of “16 round normal symbol” being selected is 100 minutes. Of 5 (= 5%). Further, the rate at which the “10-round probability variable symbol” is selected is 60/100 (= 60%), and the rate at which the “16-round probability variable symbol” is selected is 10/100 (= 10%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol for the first special symbol as a whole is 70%.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “10 round normal symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H00H” It will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the fourth column (right column) from the left of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of short times (limit number) given after the big hit game is ended is shown. Specific values for the number of time reductions are as follows.

In the case of “10 round normal symbol” or “16 round normal symbol”, the number of time reductions is given 100 times.
In the case of “10 round probability variation” or “16 round probability variation”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) shown in FIG. decide.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value for each winning symbol, and each distribution value is “10”, “20”, “30”, “40”. Corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “10 round normal symbol”, “16 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, and “16 round probability variable symbol” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. . That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting “10 round normal symbol” is 10/100 (= 10%), and the rate of selecting “16 round normal symbol” is It is 20/100 (= 20%). In addition, the rate at which “10 round probability variation” is selected is 30/100 (= 30%), and the rate at which “16 round probability variation” is selected is 40/100 (= 40%). Therefore, also for the second special symbol, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol as a whole is 70%.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “10 round normal symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as “B2H00H”. .

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
The fourth column from the left (right column) of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shows the value of the number of short hours given after the big hit game ends. Specific values for the number of time reductions are as follows. In addition, about the number of time saving given, it is the same as the case where it is a big hit with the 1st special symbol.
In the case of “10 round normal symbol” or “16 round normal symbol”, the number of time reductions is given 100 times.
In the case of “10 round probability variation” or “16 round probability variation”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.

  Note that the selection ratio of the winning symbol differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability state” or “time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates more frequently than in the normal time (when the time shortening function is not activated), so the second special symbol The working memory of is difficult to break. And in this embodiment, since the memory about the second special symbol is preferentially consumed over the first special symbol, especially if the selection ratio of “16 round probability variation big hit” is increased for the second special symbol, The “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” make it easier to win the “16 rounds probable big hit”, so there is an advantage that the player's profit can be increased accordingly.

[See Fig. 20: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, if the result of the internal lottery corresponds to 16 round big hits (16 round normal big hits or 16 rounds probable big hits) or 10 round big hits (10 round normal big hits or 10 rounds probable big hits), It is assumed that control is performed to generate a “effect” and make a big hit. The “Big Bonus Winning Variation Pattern Selection Table” defines variation patterns corresponding to multiple types of “reach production”, and if one hits 16 rounds or 10 rounds, one of them is selected. Will be selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. In addition, when winning with the time reduction function activated, a variation pattern having a short variation time (a variation pattern not performing reach production) is selected without selecting a variation pattern having a long variation time. May be. In this case, it is necessary to prepare a variation pattern selection table for each internal state and for each special symbol. The same applies to the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss.

[Example of variation pattern selection table when winning big hits]
FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table for winning a big hit.
This selection table is a table used when winning 16 rounds or 10 rounds (big change pattern definition means, variable time definition means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “243”, “246”, “247”, “248”, “ 249 ”,“ 250 ”,“ 251 ”,“ 253 ”,“ 255 (FFH) ”are provided, and“ 21 ”to“ 35 ”of“ variation pattern numbers ”are assigned to each“ comparison value ”. Assigned.

  The variation pattern numbers “21” to “28” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. The variation pattern numbers “29” to “35” correspond to special hit variation patterns. Here, the special hit fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern used when the above-mentioned pre-reading effect is executed, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern that is a hit without performing the reach effect. Note that such a variation pattern selection table is also used in the prior determination process of the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 12).

Here, the variation time of the special hit variation pattern is set as follows, and the variation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.
Variation pattern number “29”: Variation time 7.5 seconds Variation pattern number “30”: Variation time 10.0 seconds Variation pattern number “31”: Variation time 15.0 seconds Variation pattern number “32”: Variation time 20. 0 seconds Fluctuation pattern number “33”: Fluctuation time 22.5 seconds Fluctuation pattern number “34”: Fluctuation time 30.0 seconds Fluctuation pattern number “35”: Fluctuation time 45.0 seconds

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

  Here, when the first method for selecting the special variation pattern by rewriting the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) is adopted, the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) is changed from “247” to “255”. The main control CPU 72 selects any one of “29” to “35” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number) is not rewritten and the value of the destination determination effect status or the special destination determination effect status is set, the variation pattern determination random number value is not rewritten. In this case, a corresponding variation pattern (any one of variation pattern numbers “29” to “35”) is selected while referring to the values of the destination determination effect status and the special destination determination effect status.

  Even if the pre-reading effect is not executed, a special hit variation pattern may be selected depending on the value of the variation pattern determination element (variation pattern determination random number). In this case, a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern can be used according to the variation time of the special hit variation pattern.

[See Fig. 20: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines that the game state flag is selected if the winning symbol type (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round probability variation symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol”. As a result, the value (01H) of the probability variation function activation flag is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function activation means). In addition, when the type of the winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 is either “10 round normal symbol” or “16 round normal symbol”, the main control CPU 72 determines the value of the probability variation function operation flag as the gaming state flag. Are reset (low probability state setting means, low probability state transition means).

  In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round normal symbol”, “16 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation”. In any case, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag as a game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operation means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hitting is only one type of “twice open small hitting symbol”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 19: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. The main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407, and S2410 in FIG. 20). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than “0” in the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 20), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially consumed is “0”. At this time, if the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “1” or more (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “0” (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. Is specified. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: The main control CPU 72 also checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type. )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 20).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 19), and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag here. The “stop display time end command” is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. Thereby, before the special game (big player) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortening state.
Step S4400: The main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command representing a big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20). For example, if the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round normal symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. In the case of “10 round normal symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “10 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply a deviation (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value (01H) of the small hit flag is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (medium hit)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step 4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. In this case, “number of times cut” is used, but the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically guarantee that the “high probability state” will continue until the next winning is substantially obtained. In the case where there is only a single “time reduction state” instead of the “high probability state”, the count-off counter is set to a standard numerical value (for example, 100 times).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. The probability variable function operation flag or the time shortening function operation flag is reset, but since the value of the count counter is not zero in the “high probability state” as described above, it is practical. It is the time reduction function activation flag that is reset above. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 8) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38c and the time reduction state display lamp 38d, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38c. Note that the probability variation state display lamp 38c is switched to non-display (turned off) even if the probability variation function operation flag is set when the variation display of the special symbol is performed thereafter. On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38d regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output.

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number command. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the big hit symbol designated by the continuous operation number command is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number command specifies “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing “16 rounds (16R)”. Further, if the value of the continuous operation number command designates “10 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing “10 rounds (10R)”.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes a gaming process selection process (step S5100), a special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a special winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a special winning opening closing process (step S5400), and an end. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the special winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big prize opening / closing operation process and the big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed and the time for each opening at the time of big hit or small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current gaming state is a big game, that is, whether or not the big hit flag value (01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5204. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit flag is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5212. Note that this procedure may be rewritten to refer to the value of the small hit flag (however, the logic of Yes / No is reversed).

[Procedure for jackpot]
First, the procedure for the big hit is as follows.
Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Set the number of winnings). The opening pattern for each winning symbol is as described in the item “plural winning types” in the special symbol game process (FIG. 19). The interval time between rounds is set to about several seconds (for example, 2 seconds to 2.5 seconds) for “10 round symbols” and “16 round symbols”, for example. Note that the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is, for example, 9 for all winning symbols, but winnings rarely occur during an extremely short opening (about 0.1 seconds) ( Not impossible but extremely difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the jackpot winning symbol selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20). Specifically, if the large category “16 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. If “10 round symbols” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to ten. The number of execution rounds set here is stored as a corresponding value on the program (“9” for 10 times, “15” for 16 times), for example, in the buffer area of the RAM 76.

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer, the release time is a sufficient time (for example, a launch control board) that the big winning opening is easily generated during one release. The set 174 is a time during which 10 or more game balls are fired, preferably 6 seconds or more. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit release timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the release time is short (becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to win a big prize opening during one opening. This is a time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the firing control board set 174).

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Procedure for small hits]
Step S5212: On the other hand, in the case of a small hit (step S5202: No), the main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times that the special winning opening is opened based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5212, for example, two times. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S5216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hitting release timer, and during such an opening time, there is hardly any winning in the big winning opening during one opening. It becomes a short time (becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launching device unit).

  Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing. Then, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening / closing operation process.

[Big prize opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening / closing operation process. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the special winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous special winning opening release pattern setting process (step S5208 or step S5216 in FIG. 29) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 30 (open winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round in the big hit, one in the small hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the procedure of the above steps S5302 to S5310.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. Note that the release at the time of the small hit is that the value of the release timer is set to a short time, and therefore, the main control CPU 72 normally confirms that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S5310 before step S5306. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a countdown of the interval timer set in the above-described special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 or step S5218 in FIG. 29). When the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5316.

  Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not it is in a big role (during big hit game). If the current game is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5318. On the other hand, if the current game is a small hit (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the reason why the “number of times set in the current round” is determined is to deal with an opening pattern of “opening the variable winning device 30 multiple times within one round of big hit”, for example. . In the present embodiment, since such an open pattern is not particularly employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

  If a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round as described above is employed, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, and thus the procedure from step S5302 to step S5320 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening closing process.

[Large prize closing process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a special prize closing process. This special winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is a big game (big hit game), and if it is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5402.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1-14) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1-14 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes a variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process as a next jump destination in a game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 28). Then, after execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again, and repeatedly executes the above steps S5402 to S5408. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (10 times or 16 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the end process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[Small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the number-of-releases counter.

  Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5214 in FIG. 29). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes a variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process as a next jump destination in a game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 28). Then, after the execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable prize device 30 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening (2 times).

  When the actual number of times of opening at the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

  Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the end process when the release counter is reset (= 0).

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the end process. This end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the variable prize apparatus 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5503. To do.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing.

Step S5505: The main control CPU 72 deletes the continuous operation number command here.
Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 20) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, about 10,000 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, if a huge number of times such as 10,000 is set as described above, there is almost no chance that the non-winning will continue so far (the winning probability at the time of high probability is, for example, 1/39 to 1/39) The degree of probability) will continue until the next winning. On the other hand, when a substantial upper limit is set in the high probability state, the probability variation number is set to a realistic number (for example, about 10 times) (so-called number cut probability change). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 20) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, about 100 times or about 10,000 times). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: The main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. If the high-probability state function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “reduced time”. A state designation command representing “medium” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  The procedure so far is a big hit, but in the case of a big hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

  Steps S5520 and S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H) and deletes “small hit” from the internal state flag. In the case of small hits, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S5516: In any case, after the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 19) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

  FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are conceptual diagrams showing an outline of the control processing when the destination determination effect of the present embodiment is executed. FIG. 33 shows a control process in the case where the prefetch effect is executed without changing the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation corresponding to the specific lottery element, and FIG. 34 shows the fluctuation fluctuation of the fluctuation corresponding to the specific lottery element. The control process in the case of changing the pattern and executing the prefetch effect is shown.

[When the change pattern of the change is not changed]
A normal game by the pachinko machine 1 is started by driving (launching) a game ball into the game area 8a. Hereinafter, the flow of the game will be described on the assumption that the game ball is launched.

[F01: Start prize]
When a game ball flows into the game area 8a and enters the upper start winning port 26 or the lower start winning port 28a, the upper start winning port switch 80 or the lower start winning port corresponding to each start winning port is entered. The passing of the game ball is detected by the mouth switch 82, and the big hit determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number are acquired.

[F02: Look-ahead winning]
When the big hit determination random number or the variation pattern determination random number is acquired, a prefetch lottery is performed using these random numbers to determine whether or not to perform a prefetch effect next. If it is determined to execute the prefetch effect, the control process proceeds to the next F03. When it is determined not to execute the prefetch effect, the following control process is not executed.

[F03: Pre-reading production lottery]
When it is determined to execute the prefetch effect, a prefetch effect lottery is performed. Here, it is determined which type of prefetching effect is actually executed. Specifically, any one of the “prefetching effects A” to “prefetching effects F” is selected. Since the control process here is a control process when the prefetch effect is executed without changing the variation pattern of the variation corresponding to the specific lottery element, any of “prefetch effect A” to “prefetch effect C” The pre-reading effect is selected.

[F04: When prefetch effect A is selected]
When the pre-reading effect A whose total effect time is 30 seconds is selected, [F05] the current stored number is confirmed.

[F51: Number of memories 1]
If the current storage number is 1, the fluctuation pattern of the first storage is set to 30 seconds. There are two methods for setting the fluctuation pattern to a desired fluctuation time: a method for rewriting a fluctuation pattern determination random number as described above and a method for forcibly selecting a special fluctuation pattern without rewriting the fluctuation pattern determination random number (the same applies hereinafter). ). For example, when the variation pattern determination random number is rewritten, the variation pattern determination random number is rewritten to “252” regardless of the value of the variation pattern determination random number. As a result, the special deviation fluctuation pattern “14” having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected at the start of the fluctuation (see FIG. 21). In the following, the variation pattern can be set to a desired variation time by the same rewriting process.

[F52: Number of memories 2]
If the current storage number is two, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 15 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the second memory is set to 15 seconds.

[F53: Number of memories 3]
If the current storage number is 3, the first memory fluctuation pattern is set to 10 seconds, the second memory fluctuation pattern is set to 10 seconds, and the third memory fluctuation pattern is set to Set to 10 seconds.

[F54: Pre-reading effect A execution]
When the number of memories is 1, the prefetch effect A is executed using one memory, and when the number of memories is 2, the prefetch effect A is executed using two memories, and the memory number is 3. In the case of a piece, the prefetch effect A is executed using three memories.

[F55: Execution of the variation effect]
Then, after the pre-reading effect A is executed using the memory before the change is executed, the change effect is executed.

[F06: When prefetch effect B is selected]
When the pre-reading effect B having a total effect time of 60 seconds is selected, [F07] the current stored number is confirmed.

[F71: Number of memories 1]
If the current number of memories is one, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 60 seconds.

[F72: Number of memories 2]
If the current storage number is 2, the first memory variation pattern is set to 30 seconds, and the second memory variation pattern is set to 30 seconds.

[F73: Number of memories 3]
If the current memory count is 3, the first memory fluctuation pattern is set to 20 seconds, the second memory fluctuation pattern is set to 20 seconds, and the third memory fluctuation pattern is set to Set to 20 seconds.

[F74: prefetch effect B execution]
When the number of memories is 1, the prefetch effect B is executed using one memory, and when the number of memories is 2, the prefetch effect B is executed using two memories, and the memory number is 3. In the case of the number, the prefetch effect B is executed using the three memories.

[F75: Execution of the variation effect]
Then, after the prefetch effect B is executed using the memory before the change is executed, the change effect is executed.

[F08: When prefetch effect C is selected]
When the pre-reading effect C whose total effect time is 90 seconds is selected, [F09] the current stored number is confirmed.

[F91: Number of memories 1]
If the current storage number is 1, the first memory fluctuation pattern is set to 90 seconds.

[F92: Number of memories 2]
If the current storage number is 2, the first memory fluctuation pattern is set to 45 seconds, and the second memory fluctuation pattern is set to 45 seconds.

[F93: Number of memories 3]
If the current storage number is 3, the first memory fluctuation pattern is set to 30 seconds, the second memory fluctuation pattern is set to 30 seconds, and the third memory fluctuation pattern is set to Set to 30 seconds.

[F94: prefetch effect C execution]
When the number of memories is 1, the prefetch effect C is executed using one memory, and when the number of memories is 2, the prefetch effect C is executed using two memories, and the memory number is 3 If the number is individual, the prefetch effect C is executed using three memories.

[F95: Execution of the variation effect]
Then, after the prefetch effect C is executed using the memory before the change is executed, the change effect is executed.

  In this control process, the total effect time of the prefetch effect is equally divided based on the specific lottery element exclusion remaining memory number indicating the number of lottery elements stored before the specific lottery element corresponding to the change, etc. A special variation pattern having a variation time corresponding to the divided time is selected.

[When changing the fluctuation pattern]
The above control process is a control process in the case where the prefetch effect is executed without changing the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation corresponding to the specific lottery element, but the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation corresponding to the specific lottery element is also changed. When the pre-reading effect is executed, the control process shown in FIG. 34 is performed.

[G01: Start prize]
When a game ball flows into the game area 8a and enters the upper start winning port 26 or the lower start winning port 28a, the upper start winning port switch 80 or the lower start winning port corresponding to each start winning port is entered. The passing of the game ball is detected by the mouth switch 82, and the big hit determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number are acquired.

[G02: Look-ahead winning]
When the big hit determination random number or the variation pattern determination random number is acquired, a prefetch lottery is performed using these random numbers to determine whether or not to perform a prefetch effect next. If it is determined to execute the prefetch effect, the control process proceeds to the next G03. When it is determined not to execute the prefetch effect, the following control process is not executed.

[G03: Look-ahead production lottery]
When it is determined to execute the prefetch effect, a prefetch effect lottery is performed. Here, it is determined which type of prefetching effect is actually executed. Specifically, any one of the “prefetching effects A” to “prefetching effects F” is selected. Since the control process here is a control process in the case where the variation pattern of the variation corresponding to the specific lottery element is also changed to execute the prefetch effect, any one of “prefetch effect D” to “prefetch effect F” The prefetch effect is selected.

[G04: When prefetch effect D is selected]
When the pre-reading effect D whose total effect time is 30 seconds is selected, [G05] the current stored number is confirmed.

[G51: Number of memories 1]
If the current storage number is one, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 15 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation to be prefetched is set to 15 seconds.

[G52: Number of memories 2]
If the current number of memories is two, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 10 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of the second memory is set to 10 seconds, and the fluctuation of the fluctuation to be read-ahead is set. Set the pattern to 10 seconds.

[G53: Number of memories 3]
If the current number of memories is 3, the variation pattern of the first memory is set to 7.5 seconds, the variation pattern of the second memory is set to 7.5 seconds, and the third memory is stored. Is set to 7.5 seconds, and the change pattern of the change to be prefetched is set to 7.5 seconds.

[G54: Pre-reading effect D execution]
When the number of memories is one, the pre-reading effect D is executed using one front memory and one memory, and when the number is two, two front memories and one memory are stored. Is used to execute the prefetch effect D, and when the number of memories is 3, the prefetch effect D is executed using the three previous memories and the one memory. In this case, the effect is executed while the prefetch effect D is being executed.

[G06: When prefetching effect E is selected]
When the pre-reading effect E whose total effect time is 60 seconds is selected, [G07] the current stored number is confirmed.

[G71: Number of memories 1]
If the current storage number is one, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 30 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation to be prefetched is set to 30 seconds.

[G72: Number of memories 2]
If the current storage number is two, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 20 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of the second memory is set to 20 seconds, and the fluctuation of the fluctuation to be prefetched is set. Set the pattern to 20 seconds.

[G73: Number of memories 3]
If the current storage number is 3, the first memory fluctuation pattern is set to 15 seconds, the second memory fluctuation pattern is set to 15 seconds, and the third memory fluctuation pattern is set to It is set to 15 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation to be prefetched is set to 15 seconds.

[G74: Pre-reading effect E execution]
When the number of memories is one, the pre-reading effect E is executed using one front memory and one memory, and when the number of memories is two, two front memories and one memory are stored. Is used to execute the prefetch effect E, and when the number of memories is 3, the prefetch effect E is executed using the three previous memories and one memory. In this case, the effect is executed while the prefetch effect E is being executed.

[G08: When prefetch effect F is selected]
When the prefetch effect F with a total effect time of 90 seconds is selected, [G09] the current stored number is confirmed.

[G91: Number of memories 1]
If the current storage number is one, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 45 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation to be prefetched is set to 45 seconds.

[G92: 2 memories]
If the current number of memories is two, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 30 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of the second memory is set to 30 seconds, and the fluctuation of the fluctuation to be read-ahead is set. Set the pattern to 30 seconds.

[G93: Number of memories 3]
If the current number of memories is 3, the variation pattern of the first memory is set to 22.5 seconds, the variation pattern of the second memory is set to 22.5 seconds, and the third memory is stored. Is set to 22.5 seconds, and the change pattern of the change to be read-ahead is set to 22.5 seconds.

[G94: Prefetch effect F execution]
When the number of memories is one, the pre-reading effect F is executed using one front memory and one memory, and when the number is two, two front memories and one memory are stored. Is used to execute the prefetch effect F, and when the number of memories is 3, the prefetch effect F is executed using three previous memories and one memory. In this case, the effect is executed while the prefetch effect F is being executed.

  In this control process, the total effect time of the pre-reading effect is calculated based on the specific lottery element corresponding to the change and the number of lottery elements stored before the specific lottery element and the specific lottery element-containing remaining memory number. A special variation pattern having a variation time equal to the equally divided time is selected.

  FIG. 35 is a conceptual diagram showing an overview of control processing when executing a pre-determination effect of a comparative example. In the control process of the comparative example, even if it is determined that the prefetch effect is executed, the change pattern is not changed.

[H01: Start prize]
When a game ball flows into the game area 8a and enters the upper start winning port 26 or the lower start winning port 28a, the upper start winning port switch 80 or the lower start winning port corresponding to each start winning port is entered. The passing of the game ball is detected by the mouth switch 82, and the big hit determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number are acquired. Here, it is assumed that three lottery elements are already stored and the fourth lottery element is newly stored.

[H02: Look-ahead winning]
When the big hit determination random number or the variation pattern determination random number is acquired, a prefetch lottery is performed using these random numbers to determine whether or not to perform a prefetch effect next. If it is determined to execute the prefetch effect, the control process proceeds to the next H03. When it is determined not to execute the prefetch effect, the following control process is not executed. Here, in the control example of the comparative example, the type of the prefetch effect is not determined at this time. For this reason, it is necessary to select a look-ahead effect that matches the actual change time according to the change pattern at the start of change.

[H03: During the first memory digestion]
At the time of the first memory digestion, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. The pre-reading effect to be executed at this time needs to be matched with the variation pattern determined at the start of variation. Since the variation time determined by the variation pattern may be expanded or contracted depending on the number of memories and the presence or absence of reach variation, there is actually room for selecting an infinite number of variation patterns.

For example, when a variation pattern having a variation time of 5 seconds is selected, it is necessary to select a prefetch effect of 5 seconds and then execute a prefetch effect of 5 seconds.
When a variation pattern having a variation time of 10 seconds is selected, it is necessary to select a prefetch effect of 10 seconds and then execute a prefetch effect of 10 seconds.
Further, when a variation pattern having a variation time of 20 seconds is selected, it is necessary to select a prefetch effect of 20 seconds and then execute a prefetch effect of 20 seconds.
Similarly, when a variation pattern having a variation time of n seconds is selected, it is necessary to select a prefetch effect of n seconds and then execute a prefetch effect of n seconds.

[H04: Second memory digestion]
Similarly, during the second memory digestion, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. The pre-reading effect to be executed at this time needs to be matched with the variation pattern determined at the start of variation. Since the variation time determined by the variation pattern may be expanded or contracted depending on the number of memories and the presence or absence of reach variation, there is actually room for selecting an infinite number of variation patterns. For this reason, it is necessary to execute a pre-reading effect that matches the variation pattern of the special symbol even during the second memory digestion.

[H05: Third memory digestion]
Similarly, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined during the third memory digestion. The pre-reading effect to be executed at this time needs to be matched with the variation pattern determined at the start of variation. Since the variation time determined by the variation pattern may be expanded or contracted depending on the number of memories and the presence or absence of reach variation, there is actually room for selecting an infinite number of variation patterns. For this reason, it is necessary to execute a pre-reading effect that matches the variation pattern of the special symbol even during the third memory digestion.

[H06: Perform the effect]
And after performing a series of prefetching effects using the memory for three pieces, it is possible to finally execute the fluctuation effects corresponding to a specific lottery element.

  As in this comparative example, when the prefetch effects are prepared by the number of variation patterns prepared in the gaming machine, there is a problem that the program capacity and the image capacity increase. Here, in order not to increase the program capacity and the image capacity, it may be possible to execute the pre-reading effect only when a certain variation pattern is selected, but this time a restriction is added to the execution of the pre-reading effect. Therefore, another problem arises that the range of production cannot be expanded.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the type of prefetch effect (total effect time) is determined first, and the variation time of the special symbol is determined according to the determined type of prefetch effect, so the effect time as intended is secured in advance. Thus, while reducing the program capacity and the image capacity, it is possible to improve the range of effects by the pre-reading effect.

  FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 are conceptual diagrams showing an outline of control processing when a special destination determination effect is executed following the destination determination effect. FIG. 36 shows a control process when the prefetch effect is executed without changing the variation pattern of the change corresponding to the lottery element to be prefetched. FIG. 37 shows the lottery element to be prefetched. The control process in the case of changing the corresponding fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation and executing the prefetch effect is shown.

[When the change pattern of the change is not changed]
A normal game by the pachinko machine 1 is started by driving (launching) a game ball into the game area 8a. Hereinafter, the flow of the game will be described on the assumption that the game ball is launched.

[J01: Start prize]
When a game ball flows into the game area 8a and enters the upper start winning port 26 or the lower start winning port 28a, the upper start winning port switch 80 or the lower start winning port corresponding to each start winning port is entered. The passing of the game ball is detected by the mouth switch 82, and the big hit determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number are acquired.

[J02: Look-ahead winning]
When the big hit determination random number or the variation pattern determination random number is acquired, a prefetch lottery is performed using these random numbers to determine whether or not to perform a prefetch effect next. Here, since it is assumed that the acquired jackpot determination random number or fluctuation pattern determination random number satisfies the execution condition of the first determination effect, the control process proceeds to the next J03.

[J03: Look-ahead production lottery]
When it is determined to execute the pre-determination effect, a pre-reading effect lottery is performed. Here, it is determined which type of prefetching effect is actually executed. Specifically, any one of the “prefetching effects A” to “prefetching effects F” is selected. Here, it is assumed that “prefetching effect A” is selected as the predetermination effect.

[J04: When prefetching effect A is selected]
When the pre-reading effect A having a total effect time of 30 seconds is selected, [J05] the current stored number is confirmed.

[J51: Number of memories 1]
If the current storage number is 1, the fluctuation pattern of the first storage is set to 30 seconds.

[J52: Number of memories 2]
If the current storage number is two, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 15 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the second memory is set to 15 seconds.

[J53: Number of memories 3]
If the current storage number is 3, the first memory fluctuation pattern is set to 10 seconds, the second memory fluctuation pattern is set to 10 seconds, and the third memory fluctuation pattern is set to Set to 10 seconds.

[J54: Pre-reading effect A execution]
When the number of memories is 1, the prefetch effect A is executed using one memory, and when the number of memories is 2, the prefetch effect A is executed using two memories, and the memory number is 3. In the case of a piece, the prefetch effect A is executed using three memories.

[J55: Execution of the variation effect]
Then, after the pre-reading effect A is executed using the memory before the change is executed, the change effect is executed.

  The flow up to this point is a flow in the case where the predetermination effect is simply executed. However, during the execution of the predetermination effect (prefetching effect A), a new lottery element is stored, and the new lottery element is a special destination. If the execution conditions for the determination effect are satisfied, the game proceeds according to the following flow.

[J56: Start prize]
When a game ball flows into the game area 8a and enters the upper start winning port 26 or the lower start winning port 28a, the upper start winning port switch 80 or the lower start winning port corresponding to each start winning port is entered. The passing of the game ball is detected by the mouth switch 82, and the big hit determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number are acquired.

[J57: Winning prefetching]
When the big hit determination random number or the variation pattern determination random number is acquired, a prefetch lottery is performed using these random numbers to determine whether or not to perform a prefetch effect next. Here, since it is assumed that the acquired jackpot determination random number or fluctuation pattern determination random number satisfies the execution condition of the special destination determination effect, the control process proceeds to the next J58.

[J58: Pre-reading production lottery]
When it is determined to execute the special pre-determination effect, a pre-reading effect lottery is performed. Here, it is determined which type of prefetching effect is actually executed. Specifically, any one of the “prefetching effects A” to “prefetching effects F” is selected. Here, it is assumed that “prefetching effect B” is selected as the special predetermination effect.

[J06: When prefetch effect B is selected]
When the pre-reading effect B whose total effect time is 60 seconds is selected, [J07] the current stored number is confirmed.

[J71: Number of memories 1]
If the current number of memories is one, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 60 seconds.

[J72: Number of memories 2]
If the current storage number is 2, the first memory variation pattern is set to 30 seconds, and the second memory variation pattern is set to 30 seconds.

[J73: Number of memories 3]
If the current memory count is 3, the first memory fluctuation pattern is set to 20 seconds, the second memory fluctuation pattern is set to 20 seconds, and the third memory fluctuation pattern is set to Set to 20 seconds.

  By resetting such a variation pattern, the non-executed portion of the prefetch effect A as the predetermination effect is canceled, and the prefetch effect B as the special predetermination effect is executed in the future.

[J74: Pre-reading effect B execution]
When the number of memories is 1, the prefetch effect B is executed using one memory, and when the number of memories is 2, the prefetch effect B is executed using two memories, and the memory number is 3. In the case of the number, the prefetch effect B is executed using the three memories.

[J75: Execution of the variation effect]
Then, after the prefetch effect B is executed using the memory before the change is executed, the change effect is executed.

  In this control process, the total effect time of the prefetch effect is equally divided based on the special lottery element exclusion remaining memory number indicating the number of lottery elements stored before the special lottery element corresponding to the change, etc. A special variation pattern having a variation time corresponding to the divided time is selected.

[When changing the fluctuation pattern]
The above control process is a control process in the case where the special destination determination effect is executed without changing the variation pattern of the fluctuation corresponding to the special lottery element to be prefetched, but corresponds to the special lottery element. When the variation pattern of the variation is also changed to execute the special destination determination effect, the control process shown in FIG. 37 is performed.

[K01: Start prize]
When a game ball flows into the game area 8a and enters the upper start winning port 26 or the lower start winning port 28a, the upper start winning port switch 80 or the lower start winning port corresponding to each start winning port is entered. The passing of the game ball is detected by the mouth switch 82, and the big hit determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number are acquired.

[K02: Look-ahead winning]
When the big hit determination random number or the variation pattern determination random number is acquired, a prefetch lottery is performed using these random numbers to determine whether or not to perform a prefetch effect next. Here, since it is assumed that the acquired jackpot determination random number or fluctuation pattern determination random number satisfies the execution condition of the first determination effect, the control process proceeds to the next K03.

[K03: Look-ahead production lottery]
When it is determined to execute the pre-determination effect, a pre-reading effect lottery is performed. Here, it is determined which type of prefetching effect is actually executed. Specifically, any one of the “prefetching effects A” to “prefetching effects F” is selected. Here, it is assumed that “prefetching effect D” is selected as the predetermination effect.

[K04: When prefetch effect D is selected]
When the pre-reading effect D whose total effect time is 30 seconds is selected, [K05] the current stored number is confirmed.

[K51: Number of memories 1]
If the current storage number is one, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 15 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation to be prefetched is set to 15 seconds.

[K52: Number of memories 2]
If the current number of memories is two, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 10 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of the second memory is set to 10 seconds, and the fluctuation of the fluctuation to be read-ahead is set. Set the pattern to 10 seconds.

[K53: Number of memories 3]
If the current number of memories is 3, the variation pattern of the first memory is set to 7.5 seconds, the variation pattern of the second memory is set to 7.5 seconds, and the third memory is stored. Is set to 7.5 seconds, and the change pattern of the change to be prefetched is set to 7.5 seconds.

[K54: Pre-reading effect D execution]
When the number of memories is one, the pre-reading effect D is executed using one front memory and one memory, and when the number is two, two front memories and one memory are stored. Is used to execute the prefetch effect D, and when the number of memories is 3, the prefetch effect D is executed using the three previous memories and the one memory. In this case, the effect is executed while the prefetch effect D is being executed.

  The flow so far is a flow in the case of simply executing the pre-decision effect, but during the execution of the pre-decision effect (prefetch effect D), a new lottery element is stored, and the new lottery element is a special destination. If the execution conditions for the determination effect are satisfied, the game proceeds according to the following flow. However, if the pre-reading effect D is being executed and the change has already started, the pre-reading effect D is executed as it is.

[K55: Start prize]
When a game ball flows into the game area 8a and enters the upper start winning port 26 or the lower start winning port 28a, the upper start winning port switch 80 or the lower start winning port corresponding to each start winning port is entered. The passing of the game ball is detected by the mouth switch 82, and the big hit determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number are acquired.

[K56: Look-ahead winning]
When the big hit determination random number or the variation pattern determination random number is acquired, a prefetch lottery is performed using these random numbers to determine whether or not to perform a prefetch effect next. Here, since it is assumed that the acquired jackpot determination random number or fluctuation pattern determination random number satisfies the execution condition of the special destination determination effect, the control process proceeds to the next K57.

[K57: Look-ahead production lottery]
When it is determined to execute the special pre-determination effect, a pre-reading effect lottery is performed. Here, it is determined which type of prefetching effect is actually executed. Specifically, any one of the “prefetching effects A” to “prefetching effects F” is selected. Here, it is assumed that “prefetching effect E” is selected as the special predetermination effect.

[K06: When prefetching effect E is selected]
When the pre-reading effect E whose total effect time is 60 seconds is selected, [K07] the current stored number is confirmed.

[K71: Number of memories 1]
If the current storage number is one, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 30 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation to be prefetched is set to 30 seconds.

[K72: Number of memories 2]
If the current storage number is two, the fluctuation pattern of the first memory is set to 20 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of the second memory is set to 20 seconds, and the fluctuation of the fluctuation to be prefetched is set. Set the pattern to 20 seconds.

[K73: Number of memories 3]
If the current storage number is 3, the first memory fluctuation pattern is set to 15 seconds, the second memory fluctuation pattern is set to 15 seconds, and the third memory fluctuation pattern is set to It is set to 15 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation to be prefetched is set to 15 seconds.

  By resetting such a variation pattern, the non-executed portion of the prefetching effect D as the predetermination effect is canceled, and the prefetching effect E as the special predetermination effect is executed in the future.

[K74: prefetch effect E execution]
When the number of memories is one, the pre-reading effect E is executed using one front memory and one memory, and when the number of memories is two, two front memories and one memory are stored. Is used to execute the prefetch effect E, and when the number of memories is 3, the prefetch effect E is executed using the three previous memories and one memory. In this case, the effect is executed while the prefetch effect E is being executed.

  In this control process, the total effect time of the prefetch effect is calculated based on the special lottery element corresponding to the change and the number of lottery elements stored before the special lottery element and the number of remaining lottery containing the special lottery element. A special variation pattern having a variation time equal to the equally divided time is selected.

38 and 39 are conceptual diagrams showing the correspondence between the gaming state and the stored contents. Here, in the game flow on the left side of the figure, the fluctuation state of the special symbol, the increase / decrease of memory, the contents of the effect to be executed, and the like are shown. Further, the list on the right side in the drawing shows the number of lottery elements stored and the contents of the memory (the contents of the fluctuation pattern) derived from the obtained fluctuation pattern determination random numbers.
The stored contents actually only store various random numbers. However, in the illustrated example, the contents of the variation pattern derived from the variation pattern determination random numbers are shown for easy understanding.

  FIG. 38 shows a control example in the case where the prefetch effect is executed without changing the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lottery element to be prefetched, and FIG. 39 shows the lottery element to be prefetched. The example of control in the case where the variation pattern of the variation corresponding to is changed and the prefetch effect is executed is shown.

[L01: Fluctuating]
As a gaming state, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the number of memories is three. The contents of the memory are as follows. Note that the first memory indicates the oldest memory, and the fourth memory indicates the latest memory.
First memory: normal deviation fluctuation Second memory: normal deviation fluctuation Third memory: normal deviation fluctuation Fourth memory: None (free)

[L02: Increased memory]
As the gaming state, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the number of memories is increased by one and the number of memories is four because the gaming ball has entered the upper start winning opening 26. The contents of the memory are as follows.
First memory: normal deviation fluctuation Second memory: normal deviation fluctuation Third memory: normal deviation fluctuation Fourth memory: deviation after fluctuation

[L03: Winner of the pre-decision effect]
It is assumed that the execution condition of the pre-determination effect is satisfied and the pre-reading effect A is selected when the lottery element corresponding to “the change after reach” is stored in the fourth memory. Then, the variation patterns in the previous three memories are set as the special deviation variation pattern for the prefetch effect A. The contents of the memory are as follows.
First memory: special deviation fluctuation for prefetch effect A Second memory: special deviation fluctuation for prefetch effect A Third memory: special deviation fluctuation for prefetch effect A Fourth memory: after reach Outlier fluctuation

[L04: Fluctuation stop]
As the gaming state, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the variation of the next special symbol is started, and the prefetch effect A is also started. For this reason, the number of memories is decreased by 1 to 3, and the stored contents are also slid to the left in the figure. The contents of the memory are as follows.
First memory: special deviation fluctuation for pre-reading effect A Second memory: special deviation fluctuation for pre-reading effect A Third memory: fluctuation after reaching fourth fluctuation: None (empty)

[L05: Increased memory]
As a gaming state, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the pre-reading effect A is being executed. And since the game ball entered the upper start winning opening 26, the number of memories increases by one to four. The contents of the memory are as follows.
First memory: special deviation fluctuation for pre-reading effect A Second memory: special deviation fluctuation for pre-reading effect A Third memory: deviation after reach This change fourth memory: change after reach

[L06: Special destination judgment production win]
Assume that the execution condition of the special destination determination effect is satisfied and the prefetch effect B is selected when the lottery element corresponding to “the change after reach” is stored in the fourth memory. As a result, the variation pattern of the three stored contents in the foreground is reset to the special deviation variation pattern for the prefetch effect B. The contents of the memory are as follows.
First memory: special deviation fluctuation for prefetch effect B Second memory: special deviation fluctuation for prefetch effect B Third memory: special deviation fluctuation for prefetch effect B Fourth memory: after reach Per change

[L07: Fluctuation stop]
As the gaming state, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the variation of the next special symbol is started, and the prefetch effect B is also started. For this reason, the number of memories is decreased by 1 to 3, and the stored contents are also slid to the left in the figure. The contents of the memory are as follows.
First memory: special deviation fluctuation for pre-reading effect B Second memory: special deviation fluctuation for pre-reading effect B Third memory: this change after reach fourth memory: none (empty)

  Thereafter, the prefetch effect B for the remaining two times is executed, and then the reach effect is executed and the effect that is a big hit is executed.

[When changing the fluctuation pattern]
The above control process is a control process in the case where the prefetch effect is executed without changing the fluctuation pattern of the change corresponding to the special lottery element (the lottery element satisfying the execution condition of the special destination determination effect). When the change pattern of the change corresponding to a lottery element is also changed to execute the prefetch effect, the control process shown in FIG. 39 is performed.

[M01: Fluctuating]
As a gaming state, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the number of memories is three. The contents of the memory are as follows.
First memory: normal deviation fluctuation Second memory: normal deviation fluctuation Third memory: normal deviation fluctuation Fourth memory: None (free)

[M02: Increased memory]
As the gaming state, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the number of memories is increased by one and the number of memories is four because the gaming ball has entered the upper start winning opening 26. The contents of the memory are as follows.
First memory: normal deviation fluctuation Second memory: normal deviation fluctuation Third memory: normal deviation fluctuation Fourth memory: deviation after fluctuation

[M03: Winner of pre-decision production]
It is assumed that the execution condition of the pre-determination effect is satisfied and the pre-reading effect A is selected when the lottery element corresponding to “the change after reach” is stored in the fourth memory. Then, the variation patterns in the previous three memories are set as the special deviation variation pattern for the prefetch effect A. The contents of the memory are as follows.
First memory: special deviation fluctuation for prefetch effect A Second memory: special deviation fluctuation for prefetch effect A Third memory: special deviation fluctuation for prefetch effect A Fourth memory: after reach Outlier fluctuation

[M04: Fluctuation stop]
As the gaming state, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the variation of the next special symbol is started, and the prefetch effect A is also started. For this reason, the number of memories is decreased by 1 to 3, and the stored contents are also slid to the left in the figure. The contents of the memory are as follows.
First memory: special deviation fluctuation for pre-reading effect A Second memory: special deviation fluctuation for pre-reading effect A Third memory: fluctuation after reaching fourth fluctuation: None (empty)

[M05: Increased memory]
As a gaming state, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the pre-reading effect A is being executed. And since the game ball entered the upper start winning opening 26, the number of memories increases by one to four. The contents of the memory are as follows.
First memory: special deviation fluctuation for pre-reading effect A Second memory: special deviation fluctuation for pre-reading effect A Third memory: deviation after reach This change fourth memory: change after reach

[M06: Special destination judgment production win]
Assume that the execution condition of the special destination determination effect is satisfied and the prefetch effect D is selected when the lottery element corresponding to “the change after reach” is stored in the fourth memory. Then, the variation patterns of the three stored contents in the foreground are reset to the special outlier variation pattern for the prefetch effect D, and the variation patterns of the memory contents of the variation are also set to the special hit variation pattern for the prefetch effect D. . That is, in this control example, not only the content of the previous storage but also the content of the storage is changed. The contents of the memory are as follows.
First memory: special deviation fluctuation for prefetch effect D Second memory: special deviation fluctuation for prefetch effect D Third memory: special deviation fluctuation for prefetch effect D Fourth memory: prefetch effect D per special change for D

[M07: Fluctuation stop]
As the gaming state, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the variation of the next special symbol is started, and the prefetch effect D is also started. For this reason, the number of memories is decreased by 1 to 3, and the stored contents are also slid to the left in the figure. The contents of the memory are as follows.
First memory: special deviation variation for pre-reading effect D Second memory: special deviation variation for pre-reading effect D Third memory: variation per special hit for pre-reading effect D Fourth memory: none (Free)

  Thereafter, the prefetch effect D for the remaining three times is executed, and the reach effect is executed without executing the reach effect at the last change.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pre-reading effect execution condition is satisfied again during execution of a series of pre-reading effects, the special pre-decision effect is executed instead of the first determination effect to be executed first. I have to. For this reason, it is possible to execute an effect in consideration of the total effect time of the pre-determination effect and the special pre-determination effect, instead of simply continuously executing the two pre-read effects. In addition, when the destination determination effect is interrupted and the special destination determination effect is executed, the variation time corresponding to the total destination time of the special destination determination effect can be reset, so that consistency across variations can be maintained. There is an effect that a certain effect can be realized (the contents of the story can be changed).

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Among these, for the left effect symbol, a symbol row is arranged in ascending order of “1” to “9”, and for the middle effect symbol and the right effect symbol, the numbers are “9” to “1”. ”Are arranged in descending order. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 40 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect image corresponding to the change display and stop display of the special symbol. Here, an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (out). This variable display effect is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. The stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
In FIG. 40 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  Also, a marker (reference numerals M1 and M2 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. These markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the respective display numbers (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). The number of displays is increased or decreased in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game. In order to facilitate visual discrimination, the markers M1 and M2 are such that the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, as a circle (◯), and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure. In the example of FIG. 40A, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (indicated by broken lines). ) Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (stored number display effect executing means).

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the diagram) is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simply simple colors (for example, “□” figure) with a color, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the deviation. This is to objectively clarify that the result display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually “10 round big hit” or “16 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the 4th pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, blue display color or red display color). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 40 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of change of the first special symbol, the change display effect is started by the scroll change of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (symbol effect). Execution means). In other words, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. In the figure, the change display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display). At this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. ing.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the variation time shortening function is not activated and the probability variation function is also deactivated. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. The mode corresponding to each internal state will be further described later. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 40 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “8” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) of FIG. 40, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the change starts, the number of markers M1 displayed in conjunction with that decreases. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (older) memory number display is hidden in the marker M1, and an effect consumed by the internal lottery is also performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the number of working memories for the first special symbol has decreased.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 40, since the first operation memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number becomes three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are each one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here left direction) is performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 40 (D): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops changing thereafter. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when an effect symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right effect symbol sequence is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 40 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the result display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big hit (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the big win mode in the result display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 41 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of reach production executed at the time of a big hit (winning). Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. An example of the result display effect in the case where it is not disclosed that it corresponds to “probability big hit (specific type)” will be described. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  In the following reach production, the first special symbol display device 34 (or the second special symbol display device 35 may be used), after the variation display by the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is performed, the first special symbol is “10 round big hit” Stopped in the “16 round big hit” mode (eg 7-segment LED “self”, “yo”, “mouth”, “」 ”,“ F ”,“ E ”,“ L ”,“ Γ ”, etc.) (Reach effect execution means). In addition, in FIG. 41, each production | presentation symbol is simplified and shown only as the number. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
41 (A): The left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are vertically aligned on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol). The variable display effect is started by scrolling in a direction (for example, from top to bottom).

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
41 (B): Next, at a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
In FIG. 41 (C): after the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further than the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 41 (B). It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 41 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and then the variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “6” is stopped at the upper left position of the screen, and the effect symbol representing the number “7” is stopped at the lower left position.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 41 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “6” is stopped at the lower right position, and the effect symbol representing the number “7” is stopped at the upper right position of the screen. On the diagonal line (on two diagonal lines), two types of reach states of the numbers “6” — “being changed” — “6” and “7” — “being changed” — “7” have occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes two diagonal lines that are in a reach state on a diagonal line is displayed together. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. Furthermore, in this example, since there are two candidates of numbers “6” and “7” for the medium effect design (so-called double reach and double template), it is a highly anticipated reach state. In this case, if the number “7” is aligned, it is a probability variation jackpot, and if the number “6” is aligned, it is a non-probable variation jackpot. It is possible to make players feel various tensions.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach production, only the production symbols corresponding to the tempered numbers (here, “6” and “7”) are displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 41, (F): After a reach state has occurred, for example, an image representing the figure of “heart” forms a group, and a notice effect after the occurrence of reach (first time) is performed that passes diagonally on the screen. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice effect after the visually lively reach occurs, the player can have an even greater expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 41 (G): Following the notice effect after the first reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “8” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also intended to suggest (imply) or remind the player that the number “6” or “7” is a “hit” if it remains unerased to the end. Done in If the number “5” is erased and “6” remains in front of the screen, it is “ordinary (non-probable) big hit”, but if the number “6” is erased and “7” remains in front of the screen. It means “probable big hit”, and if the number “7” is also erased, it means “out of place”. In this case, for example, the number “8” is displayed on the screen after the number “7” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, the numbers “2”, “3”, “4”... Are erased in order, and as the number “5” approaches, the player's tension and expectation. The feeling will also increase. After this, for example, if up to the number “4” is erased on the screen, the next time the number “5” is finally erased, this time, “normal (non-probable) big hit” or “probable big hit” is possible. Because of the increased nature, the player's tension will increase at once.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 41 (H): When the reach production is nearing the end of the game, the content that the character's image suddenly appears on the screen as if it was split into a large image and the character emits some dialogue (or silently) (The content may be a smile) The notice effect (second time) is performed after the occurrence of reach (cut-in effect). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 5 ”is erased, then the possibility of a big hit of“ 6 ”-“ 6 ”-“ 6 ”increases” ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As a reach production different from the above, for example, if “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 6 ”are erased and the number“ 7 ”is left unerased at the end,“ 7 ”-“ 7 ”- There is also the development that “7 is a promising big hit”. When the character image appears at such a timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may finally be a promising big hit” is obtained.

[Result display effect]
In FIG. 41 (I): The last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this example, because the winning symbol internally corresponds to “16 rounds probable big hit”, the effect symbol representing the odd number “7” in the effect is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen.

  In FIG. 41 (J): Then, for example, a confirmed stop display is also performed for a result display effect as an effect symbol in synchronization with the confirmed stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The effect design fixed stop display is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such confirmation stop display, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed in the production. Further, in this case, the fourth symbol Z1 or the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding to “16 round probability variation big hit”.

  In addition, if the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, so that the staging display effect is also performed in a manner of deviation in the same manner. Execution means). In this case, by displaying numbers “5” and “8” other than “6” and “7” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Director during big role]
FIG. 42 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-bill effect performed during a big hit game when “16 round probability variable big hit” is met.

[At the start of one round]
42 (A): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and an effect image unique to the jackpot game (for example, Female character) is displayed. In addition, an effect design (here, the number “7”) corresponding to the current winning design is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously teach the player that “16 rounds probable big hit”.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 42 (B): After this, the big hit game proceeds smoothly and shifts to the final 16 rounds. At this time, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image is displayed during the big hit game. In the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect symbol (number “7”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 42 (C): At the timing when the big hit game is ended (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, the text information “Probability change mode has entered!” Is displayed in the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of fireworks mode]
FIG. 43 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect in the fireworks mode. This fireworks mode is a mode that is shifted to after a big game when it corresponds to “10-round probability variation big hit” or “16 round probability variation big hit”, and corresponds to “high probability state” and “time reduction state”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  43 (A): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “fireworks mode” state. The background image of the fireworks mode is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" in order to deeply impress the player with the motif of fireworks It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 43 (B): Since the first change (when not winning) after the end of the big hit game, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7 "). The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  In FIG. 43 (C): When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the end of the big hit game. And this “fireworks mode” is continued until the next big hit is won (actually, it is only 10,000 fluctuations, but the probability that the fireworks mode will continue further is a very low probability) . In the illustrated example, the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol is shown. However, in the time shortening state, the variable start winning device 28 is frequently operated, so Unless the launch is stopped, the variation display of the second and subsequent times after the end of the big hit game is often the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol.

[First example of first determination effect]
44 to 47 are continuous diagrams partially showing a first effect example of the first determination effect. In the present embodiment, the predetermination effect is a prefetching effect executed in the normal mode. In addition, the first effect example shows an effect example in which the reach effect is executed after the preceding determination effect. The destination determination effect of the present embodiment is a destination determination effect having continuity (story characteristics) in the contents of the effect.

[Start judgment production start (first time)]
(A) in FIG. 44: The first destination determination effect is started substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the example shown in the figure, a female character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an effect is shown in which an action that makes you notice something suddenly appears. At this time, since one operation memory is consumed, the display number of the marker M1 is decreased by 1 (4 → 3). At the upper left corner position of the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display effect is executed by scrolling in the vertical direction in a state where the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are reduced. In addition, here, for easy understanding, the lottery element where the reach effect is actually executed or the lottery element corresponding to the big hit is represented by a downward arrow ("↓" in the figure) (hereinafter referred to as "Lot"). The same).

[Progress of first judgment production]
In FIG. 44 (B): As the variation display effect of the effect symbol progresses, the stage of the first determination effect also advances. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is produced in which an image of another character (here, “lantern ghost”) appears from the left side of the screen. Here, the lantern ghost and the female character are displayed facing each other. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen ("1"-"changing"-"changing").

[Progress of first judgment production]
44 (C): The stage of the first determination effect further proceeds with the progress of the effect display variation display effect. In the example shown in the figure, there is an effect in which a female character runs away with surprised lanterns and disappears to the right side of the screen. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner of the screen ("1"-"changed"-"5").

[End of first judgment effect]
In FIG. 44 (D): In the final stage of the variable display effect, an effect is performed in which the character of “paper lantern ghost” drives out the female character and “paper lantern ghost” stays on the right side of the screen. When the special symbol change (during non-winning) is completed, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the upper left corner of the screen ("1"-"1"-"5"). The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

[Start judgment production start (second time)]
(E) in FIG. 45: The second destination determination effect is started substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the example shown in the figure, the previous lantern ghost is continuously displayed on the right side of the screen, and an effect is shown in which the lantern ghost is noticed. At this time, since one operation memory is consumed, the number of markers M1 displayed is reduced by one (3 → 2). At the upper left corner position of the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display effect is executed by scrolling in the vertical direction in a state where the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are reduced.

[Progress of first judgment production]
FIG. 45 (F): The stage of the first determination effect progresses with the progress of the variation display effect of the effect symbol. In the example shown in the figure, an effect in which an image of another female character appears from the left side of the screen is performed. Here, a female character and a lantern haunt are displayed facing each other. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen ("2"-"changing"-"changing").

[Progress of first judgment production]
In FIG. 45 (G): the stage of the first determination effect further proceeds as the variation display effect of the effect symbol progresses. In the example shown in the figure, the lantern ghost is surprised by the female character, escapes, and disappears to the right side of the screen. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen (“2” − “being changed” − “5”).

[The end of the second destination determination effect]
In FIG. 45 (H): In the final stage of the variable display effect, the “female character” kicks out the “lantern ghost” and the “female character” sits on the right side of the screen. Then, when the special symbol change (during non-winning) is finished, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the upper left corner position of the screen ("2"-"6"-"5"). The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

[Start judgment production start (third time)]
In FIG. 46, (I): The third destination determination effect is started substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the example shown in the figure, the previous female character is continuously displayed on the right side of the screen, and an effect is shown in which the female character suddenly notices something. At this time, since one operation memory is consumed, the display number of the marker M1 is decreased by one (2 → 1). At the upper left corner position of the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display effect is executed by scrolling in the vertical direction in a state where the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are reduced.

[Progress of first judgment production]
In FIG. 46 (J): The stage of the first determination effect also advances as the change display effect of the effect symbol progresses. In the example shown in the drawing, an effect is produced in which an image of yet another character (an umbrella ghost) appears from the left side of the screen. Here, the haunted umbrella and the female character are displayed facing each other. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen ("1"-"changing"-"changing").

[Progress of first judgment production]
In FIG. 46 (K): The stage of the first determination effect further proceeds with the progress of the variation display effect of the effect symbol. In the example shown in the figure, there is an effect in which a female character escapes in surprise with the ghost of an umbrella and disappears to the right side of the screen. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen ("1"-"changing"-"3").

[The end of the third point determination effect]
In FIG. 46 (L): In the final stage of the variable display effect, an effect is performed in which “ghost of the umbrella” expels “female character” and “ghost of the umbrella” stays on the right side of the screen. When the special symbol change (during non-winning) is completed, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the upper left corner of the screen ("1"-"9"-"3"). The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

[First judgment production start (fourth), the change]
(M) in FIG. 47: The fourth destination determination effect is started substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the example shown in the figure, the ghost of the umbrella is continuously displayed on the right side of the screen, and an effect is shown in which the ghost of the umbrella is noticed. At this time, since one operation memory is consumed, the display number of the marker M1 is decreased by 1 (1 → 0). At the upper left corner position of the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display effect is executed by scrolling in the vertical direction in a state where the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are reduced.

[Progress of first judgment production]
In FIG. 47 (N): The stage of the first determination effect progresses with the progress of the variation display effect of the effect symbol. In the example shown in the figure, an effect in which an image of another female character appears from the left side of the screen is performed. Here, the female character and the haunted umbrella are displayed facing each other. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner of the screen ("7"-"changing"-"changing").

[Progress of first judgment production]
47 (O): The stage of the first determination effect further proceeds with the progress of the variation display effect of the effect symbol. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which the ghost of the umbrella is surprised to escape from the female character and disappears to the right side of the screen. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner of the screen ("7"-"changing"-"changing").

[End of the 4th destination determination effect]
In FIG. 47 (P): In the final stage of the variable display effect, the “female character” drives out the “ghost of the umbrella” and the “female character” sits on the right side of the screen. On the screen, the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed at the same time. At this time, the numbers “7”-“being changed”-“7” are displayed in a horizontal line (on one line) on the screen. Reach condition has occurred. On the screen, an image for emphasizing one line in a reach state is also displayed. After that, the reach effect described above is executed, and the effect that the big hit is lost is executed.

  Such a first effect example is assumed as an effect example executed when the prefetch effect B is selected. However, when the prefetch effect A is selected, the variation time of each part is set to be short. Therefore, the content of the production is simplified compared to the first production example. In addition, when the pre-reading effect C is selected, the variation time of each part is set to be long, so that the content of the effect is greater than that of the first effect example.

[Second example of the first determination effect]
48 and 49 are continuous diagrams partially showing a second effect example of the first determination effect. The 2nd production example has shown the production example which becomes a big hit as it is, without performing a reach production after a previous judgment production.

[Start judgment production start (first time)]
(A) in FIG. 48: The first destination determination effect is started substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the example shown in the figure, a female character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an effect is shown in which an action that makes you notice something suddenly appears. At this time, since one operation memory is consumed, the display number of the marker M1 is decreased by one (2 → 1). At the upper left corner position of the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display effect is executed by scrolling in the vertical direction in a state where the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are reduced.

  Here, the female character displayed on the right side of the screen is displayed in a manner of wearing a hat as in the previous production example, but this hat is given a specific pattern. By displaying such a specific pattern different from normal, it can be suggested that this is a look-ahead effect that increases the expectation of a big hit for the player.

[Progress of first judgment production]
(B) in FIG. 48: As the variation display effect of the effect symbol progresses, the stage of the first determination effect also advances. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is produced in which an image of another character (here, “lantern ghost”) appears from the left side of the screen. Here, the lantern ghost and the female character are displayed facing each other. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner of the screen ("5"-"changing"-"changing").

[Progress of first judgment production]
(C) in FIG. 48: As the variation display effect of the effect symbol progresses, the stage of the first determination effect further proceeds. In the example shown in the figure, there is an effect in which a female character runs away with surprised lanterns and disappears to the right side of the screen. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen ("5"-"changed"-"2").

[End of first judgment effect]
In FIG. 48 (D): In the final stage of the variable display effect, an effect is performed in which the character of “paper lantern ghost” drives out the female character and “paper lantern ghost” stays on the right side of the screen. When the special symbol change (during non-winning) is completed, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the upper left corner of the screen ("5"-"6"-"2"). The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

[Start judgment production start (second time), the change concerned]
(E) in FIG. 49: The second destination determination effect is started substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the example shown in the figure, the previous lantern ghost is continuously displayed on the right side of the screen, and an effect is shown in which the lantern ghost is noticed. At this time, since one operation memory is consumed, the display number of the marker M1 is decreased by 1 (1 → 0). At the upper left corner position of the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display effect is executed by scrolling in the vertical direction in a state where the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are reduced.

[Progress of first judgment production]
In FIG. 49 (F): As the variation display effect of the effect symbol progresses, the stage of the first determination effect also advances. In the illustrated example, there is an effect in which images of two other female characters appear from the left side of the screen. Here, two female characters and a lantern haunt are displayed facing each other. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen ("changed"-"changed"-"changed").

  Here, since the female characters displayed on the right side of the screen are not one person but two, it is possible to give the player a different sense and to increase the expectation of the big hit. In addition, the two female characters are wearing clothes with a specific pattern similar to the previous production example. It is possible to teach the player that the degree of expectation for the big hit is also improved by such a change in the pattern of the clothes.

[Progress of first judgment production]
In FIG. 49 (G): The stage of the first determination effect further progresses with the progress of the variation display effect of the effect symbol. In the example shown in the figure, two female characters surround the lantern ghost from the left and right, and an effect is displayed that makes the lantern ghost displayed in the center. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen ("changed"-"changed"-"changed").

[The end of the second destination determination effect]
In FIG. 49 (H): In the final stage of the variable display effect, an effect is performed in which “two female characters” drive away the “lantern ghost” and the small “lantern ghost” escapes to the left side of the screen. . When the special symbol change (during winning) is completed, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the center position of the screen ("7"-"7"-"7"). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a winning manner (for example, red display color).

  As described above, according to the second effect example, the reach effect is not executed after the prefetch effect is completed, but the special success / failure effect that the result of the internal lottery becomes clear in the prefetch effect is executed. Thus, a new game can be exhibited there (special success / failure effect execution means). In addition, since the result of the internal lottery becomes clear in the pre-reading effect, the result of the internal lottery is promptly transmitted to the player, whether winning or not, so that the game efficiency can be improved accordingly.

[First example of special destination determination effect]
50 and 51 are continuous diagrams partially showing a first effect example of the special destination determination effect. In the present embodiment, the special destination determination effect is a prefetching effect executed in the normal mode. Here, the “special pre-decision effect” is a pre-read effect that is executed when a special lottery element newly stored during the execution of the pre-decision effect satisfies the execution conditions of the pre-read effect, This is a look-ahead effect of content having relevance to the effect content.

  Further, the first effect example assumes a case where a new lottery element (special lottery element) satisfying the prefetch execution condition is stored during the execution of the first pre-determination effect. In this case, the execution of the second and subsequent destination determination effects is canceled, and the first special destination determination effect is started instead.

[Start judgment production start (first time)]
(A) in FIG. 50: The first destination determination effect is started substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the example shown in the figure, a female character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an effect is shown in which an action that makes you notice something suddenly appears. At this time, since one operation memory is consumed, the display number of the marker M1 is decreased by 1 (4 → 3). At the upper left corner position of the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display effect is executed by scrolling in the vertical direction in a state where the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are reduced.

[Progress of first judgment production]
(B) in FIG. 50: As the variation display effect of the effect symbol progresses, the stage of the first determination effect also advances. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is produced in which an image of another character (here, “lantern ghost”) appears from the left side of the screen. Here, the lantern ghost and the female character are displayed facing each other. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen ("1"-"changing"-"changing").

[Progress of first judgment production]
(C) in FIG. 50: The stage of the first determination effect further progresses with the progress of the variation display effect of the effect symbol. In the example shown in the figure, there is an effect in which a female character runs away with surprised lanterns and disappears to the right side of the screen. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner of the screen ("1"-"changed"-"5").

[End of first judgment effect]
In FIG. 50 (D): In the final stage of the variable display effect, an effect is performed in which the “lantern ghost” character expels the female character and “lantern ghost” stays on the right side of the screen. When the special symbol change (during non-winning) is completed, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the upper left corner of the screen ("1"-"1"-"5"). The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  At this time, when the number of memories of the first special symbol is increased by 1 (specifically, one game ball has entered the upper start winning opening 26), there is an effect in which one marker M1 is lit and displayed. Is called. For such an effect, for example, the player is informed that the memory corresponding to the first special symbol has been increased by causing a new marker M1 to appear at a position where the marker M1 has not been displayed. To be done.

  Then, the special lottery element newly stored during the execution of the destination determination effect is a memory that satisfies the execution condition of the special destination determination effect (for example, a lottery element corresponding to a big hit variation or a super reach effect is scheduled to be executed). A lottery element). Here, for easy understanding, a lottery element that actually satisfies the execution condition of the special destination determination effect is represented by a thick downward arrow (“↓” in the figure). It is assumed that the thin arrow on the left side of the thick arrow is a lottery element that is lost when the reach effect is executed.

  Then, normally, after executing the second destination determination effect, the third destination determination effect, and the fourth destination determination effect, the reach effect is executed together with the fourth destination determination effect, Reach production is executed again with the next change. However, in such a flow of production, the flow of production related to the pre-reading production is interrupted in the middle.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first special destination determination effect is performed at the timing when the second destination determination effect is originally executed by canceling the execution of the second and subsequent destination determination effects and the next run-off effect. Has started.
However, in this case, since the first special pre-decision effect is executed next to the first pre-decision effect, both pre-read effects are the first (first time), and the story characteristics are It will overlap.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the effect of the special pre-determination effect is reorganized according to the degree of overlap of the pre-reading effects (that is, how many times the pre-determination effect is executed and then the special destination determination effect is executed). I have to. In this effect example, since the first determination effect for the first time has already been executed, the special destination determination effect having the same contents as the first determination effect for the first time shown in FIG. 44 is not executed, but the first time shown below. The special destination determination effect is executed.

[Special destination judgment production start (first time)]
In FIG. 51, (E): The first special destination determination effect is started substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the example shown in the figure, in the first destination determination effect, an effect is performed in which a female character who has run away with a lantern ghost is crying. In this way, by allowing a female character that appeared in the first destination determination effect to appear again in the special destination determination effect, it is possible to provide continuity of the story between the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect. it can. At this time, since one operation memory is consumed, the display number of the marker M1 is decreased by 1 (4 → 3). At the upper left corner position of the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display effect is executed by scrolling in the vertical direction in a state where the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are reduced.

[Progress of special destination determination effects]
In FIG. 51 (F): The stage of the special destination determination effect also advances as the change display effect of the effect symbol progresses. In the example shown in the figure, an effect in which a female character scheduled to appear in the next (second) special destination determination effect appears from the right side of the screen. A crying female character and a newly appearing female character are displayed facing each other. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner of the screen ("3"-"changed"-"changed").

[Progress of special destination determination effects]
In FIG. 51 (G): The stage of the special destination determination effect further proceeds as the variation display effect of the effect symbol progresses. In the example shown in the figure, a female character that has appeared from the right side of the screen taps the shoulder of the crying female character on the left side and lays down. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen ("3"-"being changed"-"7").

[End of first special destination determination effect]
In FIG. 51 (H): In the final stage of the variable display effect, an effect is performed in which the female character who has licked the crying female character moves wildly in order to pass the cry of the crying female character. . When the special symbol change (during non-winning) is completed, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the upper left corner of the screen ("3"-"2"-"7"). The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  Thereafter, the second special destination determination effect and the third special destination determination effect are executed, and the super reach effect is executed together with the fourth special destination determination effect. The second special destination determination effect has the same content as the second destination determination effect (see FIG. 45), and the third special destination determination effect is the third destination determination effect (see FIG. 46). The fourth special destination determination effect can be the same effect content as the fourth destination determination effect (see FIG. 47).

[Second example of special destination determination effect]
52 to 54 are continuous diagrams partially showing a second effect example of the special destination determination effect. In the previous first effect example, the example of the effect of starting the execution of the special destination determination effect at the time when the first target determination effect is completed has been described. However, here, the special effect at the time when the second target determination effect is ended. An example of an effect that starts execution of the first determination effect will be described. In this case, the execution of the third and subsequent destination determination effects is canceled, and instead, the first special destination determination effect is started.

[Start judgment production start (second time)]
In FIG. 52 (A): The second destination determination effect is started substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is assumed that the first destination determination effect has already ended. In the example shown in the drawing, the lantern ghost that appeared in the first determination effect is continuously displayed on the right side of the screen, and the lantern haunted appearance that makes you notice something suddenly is performed. At this time, since one operation memory is consumed, the number of markers M1 displayed is reduced by one (3 → 2). At the upper left corner position of the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display effect is executed by scrolling in the vertical direction in a state where the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are reduced.

[Progress of first judgment production]
In FIG. 52 (B): The stage of the first determination effect progresses with the progress of the variation display effect of the effect symbol. In the example shown in the figure, an effect in which an image of another female character appears from the left side of the screen is performed. Here, a female character and a lantern haunt are displayed facing each other. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen ("2"-"changing"-"changing").

[Progress of first judgment production]
In FIG. 52 (C): the stage of the first determination effect further proceeds as the variation display effect of the effect symbol progresses. In the example shown in the figure, the lantern ghost is surprised by the female character, escapes, and disappears to the right side of the screen. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen (“2” − “being changed” − “5”).

[The end of the second destination determination effect]
In FIG. 52 (D): In the final stage of the variable display effect, the “female character” kicks out the “lantern ghost” and the “female character” sits on the right side of the screen. Then, when the special symbol change (during non-winning) is finished, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the upper left corner position of the screen ("2"-"6"-"5"). The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  At this time, when the number of memories of the first special symbol is increased by 1 (specifically, one game ball has entered the upper start winning opening 26), there is an effect in which one marker M1 is lit and displayed. Is called. For such an effect, for example, the player is informed that the memory corresponding to the first special symbol has been increased by causing a new marker M1 to appear at a position where the marker M1 has not been displayed. To be done.

  Then, the special lottery element newly stored during the execution of the destination determination effect is a memory that satisfies the execution condition of the special destination determination effect (for example, a lottery element corresponding to a big hit variation or a super reach effect is scheduled to be executed). A lottery element). Here, for easy understanding, a lottery element that actually satisfies the execution condition of the special destination determination effect is represented by a thick downward arrow (“↓” in the figure). It is assumed that the thin arrow on the left side of the thick arrow is a lottery element that is lost when the reach effect is executed.

  Then, normally, after executing the third destination determination effect and the fourth destination determination effect, the reach effect is executed together with the fourth destination determination effect. Will be executed. However, in such a flow of production, the flow of production related to the pre-reading production is interrupted in the middle.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first special destination determination effect is performed at the timing when the third destination determination effect is originally executed by canceling the execution of the third and subsequent destination determination effects and the next run-off effect. Has started.
However, in this case, since the first and second special destination determination effects are executed next to the first and second destination determination effects, the first and second effects are duplicated. Will end up.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the effect of the special pre-determination effect is reorganized according to the degree of overlap of the pre-reading effects (that is, how many times the pre-determination effect is executed and then the special destination determination effect is executed). I have to. In this production example, since the two previous determination effects are already executed, the special destination determination effects having the same contents as the first and second first determination effects shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 are not executed. The first special destination determination effect and the second special destination determination effect shown below are executed.

[Special destination judgment production start (first time)]
(E) in FIG. 53: The first special destination determination effect is started substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the example shown in the figure, in the second destination determination effect, an effect that a lantern ghost that ran away in surprise with a female character is crying is executed. In this way, by allowing the lantern ghost that appeared in the second destination determination effect to appear again in the special destination determination effect, the continuity of the story can be provided between the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect. it can. At this time, since one operation memory is consumed, the number of markers M1 displayed is reduced by one (3 → 2). At the upper left corner position of the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display effect is executed by scrolling in the vertical direction in a state where the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are reduced.

[Progress of special destination determination effects]
In FIG. 53 (F): The stage of the special destination determination effect also advances as the variation display effect of the effect symbol progresses. In the example shown in the figure, an effect that a ghost of an umbrella scheduled to appear in a subsequent special destination determination effect appears from the right side of the screen. And the lantern ghost that is crying and the newly born umbrella ghost are facing each other. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner of the screen ("8"-"changing"-"changing").

[Progress of special destination determination effects]
FIG. 53 (G): The stage of the special destination determination effect further progresses as the variation display effect of the effect symbol progresses. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which the ghost of the umbrella that has appeared from the right side of the screen grieves the crying lantern ghost on the left side. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen (“8” — “being changed” — “4”).

[End of first special destination determination effect]
In FIG. 53 (H): In the final stage of the variable display effect, an effect is performed in which the ghost of the umbrella moves while tilting obliquely so as to pass the haunted habit of the crying umbrella. When the special symbol change (during non-winning) is completed, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the upper left corner of the screen ("8"-"7"-"4"). The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

[Special destination judgment production start (second time)]
(I) in FIG. 54: The second special destination determination effect is started substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the example shown in the figure, the female character who has driven out the lantern ghost in the second destination determination effect is displayed on the right side of the screen. In this way, by allowing the female character that appeared in the second destination determination effect to appear again in the special destination determination effect, it is possible to provide continuity of the story between the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect. it can. At this time, since one operation memory is consumed, the display number of the marker M1 is decreased by one (2 → 1). At the upper left corner position of the liquid crystal display 42, the variable display effect is executed by scrolling in the vertical direction in a state where the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are reduced.

[Progress of special destination determination effects]
In FIG. 54 (J): The stage of the special destination determination effect also advances with the progress of the effect display variation display effect. In the illustrated example, the female character displayed on the right side of the screen moves to the left side of the screen, and there is an effect of singing a song there. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner of the screen ("6"-"changed"-"changed").

[Progress of special destination determination effects]
54 (K): The stage of the special destination determination effect further proceeds with the progress of the variation display effect of the effect symbol. In the example shown in the figure, the female character displayed on the left side of the screen moves to the right side of the screen, and there is an effect in which the arm is folded and thinking. The effect design continues the variable display effect at the upper left corner position of the screen ("6"-"changing"-"5").

[End of second special destination determination effect]
In FIG. 54 (L): In the final stage of the variable display effect, an effect is presented in which the female character who has moved to the right side of the screen smiles happily. Then, when the special symbol change (during non-winning) is finished, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the upper left corner position of the screen ("6"-"7"-"5"). The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  Thereafter, the third special destination determination effect is executed, and the super reach effect is executed together with the third special destination determination effect. The third special destination determination effect can be the same as the third destination determination effect (see FIG. 46).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the part of the effect content of the special destination determination effect is reorganized by the amount of execution of the destination determination effect, the special destination determination effect follows the destination determination effect. Even if it is performed, the following special destination determination effect can be performed without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach notice effect, memory number display effect, pre-decision effect (pre-read effect), special pre-determination effect (pre-read effect), etc. are all controlled through the following control processes. .

[Production control processing]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of effect control processing executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), and acoustic driving. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, number cut There are a counter value command, a variation pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a destination determination information command, a special destination determination information command, and the like.

  Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-described stored number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the result display effect using the effect symbols, and controls the effect contents during the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach occurrence, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40g. The movable body 40g operates using the movable body solenoid 57 as a drive source, and performs an effect in synchronism with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 as described above or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 55).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of effect symbol management processing. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is selected as a jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 19) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or produces an effect pattern for the notice effect (reach occurrence other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Select a previous notice pattern, a reach notice pattern after reach, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the result display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the result display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed within the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the result display effect. As a result, the result display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (execution of the symbol effect) means). However, in the present embodiment, at the time of a small hit, the result display effect is executed in a manner similar to or approximated to the loss.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of 16 round big hits, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 16-round big role effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). . As a result, the image of the prominent effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 55) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 55). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that no demonstration effect command is stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S603a.

  Step S603a: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a destination determination information command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether the destination determination information command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the destination determination information command is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S603b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the destination determination information command is stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S603b.

  Step S603b: The effect control CPU 126 executes a first determination effect setting process. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart. When the first determination effect setting process is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S603c.

  Step S603c: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a special destination determination information command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the special destination determination information command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the special destination determination information command is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S603d. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the special destination determination information command is stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S603d.

  Step S603c: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special destination determination effect setting process. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart. When the special destination determination effect setting process is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule (change time, reach type and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, stop display To determine the mode of the Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but when it corresponds to 10 round big hit or 16 round big hit, the production control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. Note that, in the big hit effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched for each big hit stop symbol.

  However, if the destination determination effect execution flag is ON, the effect pattern selected in the destination determination effect selection process (step S802 in FIG. 59) is used, and if the destination determination effect execution flag is ON, the special destination The effect pattern selected in the determination effect selection process (step S902 in FIG. 60) is used. In addition, when the content of production is reorganized (step S908 in FIG. 60), the reorganized production pattern is used.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of detachment is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.).

  However, if the destination determination effect execution flag is ON, the effect pattern selected in the destination determination effect selection process (step S802 in FIG. 59) is used, and if the destination determination effect execution flag is ON, the special destination The effect pattern selected in the determination effect selection process (step S902 in FIG. 60) is used. In addition, when the content of production is reorganized (step S908 in FIG. 60), the reorganized production pattern is used.

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  However, if the destination determination effect execution flag is ON, or if the special destination determination effect execution flag is ON, the effect pattern selected in the destination determination effect selection process (step S802 in FIG. 59) or the special destination determination effect It is preferable to select a notice effect that does not interfere with the effect pattern selected in the selection process (step S902 in FIG. 60). Specifically, it is preferable not to select the advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach, and to select the advance notice effect after the occurrence of reach.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 57), the variation display effect and the result display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here (effect execution means).

[Destination effect setting process]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described destination determination effect setting process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S800: First, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and analyzes the contents of the destination determination information command stored in the command buffer area. By analyzing the contents of the pre-determination information command, it is possible to confirm what pre-reading effect is to be executed using how many memories. Note that the contents of the pre-determination information command are deleted after the series of pre-reading effects has been executed.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 executes a prefetch effect selection process (predetermined effect executing means). The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern of a prefetch effect to be executed at the time of the present variable display effect from the contents of the pre-determination information command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern as shown in FIGS. When the pre-determining information command indicates that any one of the pre-reading effects D, E, and F is selected, the effect control CPU 126 performs special processing in the final variation (the variation) of the pre-reading effects D, E, and F. A process of selecting an effect pattern of the success / failure effect is executed (special success / failure effect executing means). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern such as FIG.

Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 sets the first determination effect execution flag to ON. By setting the first determination effect execution flag to ON, in the subsequent processing, the effect control CPU 126 can recognize that the first determination effect is being executed. The destination determination effect execution flag is stored in the RAM 130, and is set to OFF when execution of the final part of the series of destination determination effects is started or when execution of the special destination determination effect is started.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 57).

[Special destination judgment effect setting processing]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special destination determination effect setting process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S900: First, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and analyzes the contents of the special destination determination information command stored in the command buffer area. By analyzing the contents of the special pre-determination information command, it is possible to confirm what pre-reading effect is to be executed using how many memories. Note that the contents of the special destination determination information command are deleted after the execution of a series of prefetch effects is completed.

  Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 executes special destination determination effect selection processing (special destination determination effect execution means). The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern of a prefetch effect to be executed at the time of the present variable display effect from the contents of the special destination determination information command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern as shown in FIGS. When the pre-determining information command indicates that any one of the pre-reading effects D, E, and F is selected, the effect control CPU 126 performs special processing in the final variation (the variation) of the pre-reading effects D, E, and F. A process of selecting an effect pattern of the success / failure effect is executed (special success / failure effect executing means). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern such as FIG.

  Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the first determination effect execution flag is ON. The destination determination effect execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not the destination determination effect is being executed, and is stored in the RAM 130 (ON → during execution; OFF → not executed).

  As a result, if the destination determination effect execution flag is ON (step S904: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S906 and step S908. On the other hand, if the destination determination effect execution flag is OFF (step S904: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S906 and step S908.

  Step S906: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process for confirming the number of executions of the first determination effect. In this case, since the destination determination effect is already being executed, the effect control CPU 126 checks how much the currently executed destination determination effect has progressed. Confirmation of how far the destination determination effect has progressed can be confirmed by counting how many times the symbols have changed since the destination determination information command was received.

  Step S908: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process for reorganizing the effect content of the special destination determination effect (effect content reorganizing means). Specifically, a process of replacing the effect at the head part of the special destination determination effect based on the number of executions of the destination determination effect confirmed in the previous step S906 is executed. For example, if the number of executions of the destination determination effect is “1”, the contents of the first special destination determination effect are replaced, and if the number of executions of the destination determination effect is “2”, the first special destination determination effect and the second time are performed. The process of replacing the content with the special destination determination effect is executed. If the contents of the special destination determination effect are not reorganized (step S904: No), the contents of the destination determination effect are the same as the contents of the special destination determination effect. A special destination determination effect in which the color is changed (for example, an effect in which the color of an appearing character is changed) can also be used.

Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 sets a special destination determination effect execution flag to ON. By setting the special destination determination effect execution flag to ON, in the subsequent processing, the effect control CPU 126 can recognize that the special destination determination effect is being executed. The special destination determination effect execution flag is stored in the RAM 130, and is set to OFF after the series of execution of the special destination determination effect is completed.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 58).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the prefetching effect (predetermining effect), if the executable condition of the prefetching effect (special predetermining effect) is further satisfied, Since the special predetermining effect is executed and the prefetching effect is continued as a result, it is possible to avoid the predictability of the prefetching effect and to widen the range of the effect by the prefetching effect.

In addition, when executing a pre-decision effect or a special pre-decision effect, the type of prefetch effect (total effect time) is determined first, and the variation time of the special symbol is determined in accordance with the determined type of prefetch effect. The production time (production scale) as intended in advance can be ensured.
For this reason, the fluctuation time at the time of executing the pre-reading effect does not change depending on the number of memories at the start of the change, and the pre-reading effect with enhanced effect contents can be executed effectively.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect executed across a plurality of variations have been described in the example of executing in the normal mode in the low probability state and the non-time reduction state. You may perform in the fireworks mode which is a state and a time reduction state, and the mode which is a low probability state and a time reduction state.

  In the above-described embodiment, the total effect time of the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect has been described as being equally divided based on the number of memories, but the total effect time may not be equally divided. For example, if the total effect time of the destination determination effect and the special destination determination effect is “30 seconds” and the number of memories is “3”, each effect part is “5 seconds”, “5 seconds”, “20 seconds”, etc. You may divide | segment into the condition equally.

  In the embodiment described above, when the prefetch effect is continued as long as possible (when the special predetermination effect is further executed after the special predetermination effect), a series of prefetchings from the first predetermination effect to the fourth predetermination effect. After executing the effect, the pre-reading effect can be executed in a loop by executing the effect contents of the first pre-determination effect again. However, when the same prefetch effect is executed in a loop, it may be difficult to know how many times the prefetch effect has been executed. In this case, for example, by changing the color of the character and the items held by the character from the look-ahead effect in the second lap, basically, a look-ahead effect with different details is configured even for the same effect content. As a result, prefetch effects with different contents can be continued as much as possible.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the effect content of the pre-reading effect is reorganized, the example of reorganizing the effect content of the special pre-decision effect has been described. You may give continuity between special destination determination effects.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board 8a Game area 20 Start gate 26 Upper start prize port 28 Variable start prize device 28a Lower start prize port 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol Display device 34a First special symbol operation memory lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (14)

When the internal lottery related to the player's profit is executed during the game, the symbol display means for displaying and displaying the symbol in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery after the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time;
A variation pattern defining means for predefining a plurality of variation patterns with respect to a variation pattern related to the variation time of the symbol displayed by the symbol display means,
When a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a lottery element necessary for execution of the internal lottery;
Accompanying the acquisition of the lottery element by the lottery element acquisition means, a fluctuation pattern for acquiring a fluctuation pattern determination element for determining which one of the plurality of fluctuation patterns defined by the fluctuation pattern definition means is to be selected A determinant acquisition means;
Storage means for storing the lottery elements acquired by the lottery element acquisition means and the variation pattern determination elements acquired by the variation pattern determination element acquisition means in the order of acquisition;
An internal lottery executing means for consuming the lottery elements stored in the storage means in the order in which they are stored and executing the internal lottery when a start condition for starting the symbol variation display by the symbol display means is satisfied;
When the internal lottery is executed by the internal lottery execution means, one of the plurality of variation patterns is selectively determined based on the variation pattern determination element corresponding to the consumed lottery element. A variation pattern determining means;
The symbol effect executing means for executing the stop display effect corresponding to the stop display of the symbol by the symbol display means after executing the change display effect corresponding to the symbol change display by the symbol display means within at least the change time. When,
When the lottery element is newly stored by the storage means, the lottery result destination determination means for determining in advance at least the result of the internal lottery using the new lottery element before the start condition is satisfied;
When the variation pattern determination element is newly stored by the storage means, any variation pattern is selected from the plurality of variation patterns using the new variation pattern determination element before the start condition is satisfied. A variation pattern destination determination means for determining in advance,
For a specific lottery element newly stored by the storage means, if the previous determination result by the lottery result destination determination means or the variation pattern destination determination means satisfies a specific condition, at least the specific lottery element A destination determination effect execution unit that executes a destination determination effect that reflects a previous determination result by the lottery result destination determination unit or the variation pattern destination determination unit, using a specific period until the lottery execution unit consumes ,
A special lottery element is newly stored by the storage means within the specific period in which the predetermination effect execution means is being executed, and the lottery result destination for the newly stored special lottery element If the determination result or the previous determination result by the variation pattern destination determination unit satisfies a special condition, the lottery result is obtained using at least a special period until the special lottery element is consumed by the internal lottery execution unit. Special destination determination effect execution means for reflecting the previous determination result by the destination determination means or the variation pattern destination determination means and executing the special destination determination effect having contents related to the effect contents of the destination determination effect. A gaming machine comprising In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The variation pattern defining means includes
As the plurality of variation patterns, a plurality of special variation patterns having a fixed variation time are further defined,
For the specific lottery element newly stored by the storage means, if the previous determination result by the lottery result destination determination means or the variation pattern destination determination means satisfies a specific condition, the determination result is executed by the destination determination effect execution means. First total effect time determining means for determining a total effect time of the destination determination effect;
When the total effect time of the first determination effect is determined by the first total effect time determining unit, the change pattern determining unit is made to select the special variation pattern, thereby storing at least before the specific lottery element. First variation time matching means for matching a total variation time of a symbol that is variably displayed by consuming one or a plurality of selected lottery elements to a total performance time of the destination determination effect;
A special lottery element is newly stored by the storage means within the specific period in which the predetermination effect execution means is being executed, and the lottery result destination for the newly stored special lottery element A second total effect time for determining a total effect time of the special destination determination effect executed by the special destination determination effect executing means when the determination result in advance by the determination means or the variation pattern destination determination means satisfies a special condition A determination means;
When the total effect time of the special destination determination effect is determined by the second total effect time determination unit, the total variation time matched by the first variation time matching unit and the total effect time of the destination determination effect Regardless of the relationship, by causing the variation pattern determining means to select the special variation pattern, at least one or a plurality of lottery elements stored before the special lottery element are consumed and displayed in a variable manner. A gaming machine, further comprising second variation time matching means for matching a total variation time of a symbol to a total performance time of the special destination determination effect. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The special destination determination effect execution means
The lottery in which the destination determination effect corresponding to non-winning is executed by the destination determination effect execution unit, and the previous determination result by the lottery result destination determination unit or the variation pattern destination determination unit corresponds to the winner A gaming machine characterized by executing the special destination determination effect corresponding to winning as a condition satisfying the special condition when the determination result is an element. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The special destination determination effect execution means
A special lottery element is further stored by the storage means during the special period in which the special destination determination effect is being executed, and the lottery result destination determination means or the variation pattern destination determination is further performed for the stored special lottery element. When the determination result in advance by the means satisfies the special condition, the special destination determination effect is executed using at least a period until the special lottery element is consumed by the internal lottery execution means. A gaming machine. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The special destination determination effect execution means
As long as the lottery element exists when the start condition is satisfied, the special determination result by the lottery result destination determination unit or the variation pattern destination determination unit is any special determination result. A gaming machine, wherein the special destination determination effect is executed as satisfying a condition. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 5,
The first variation time matching means includes:
By rewriting a variation pattern determining element corresponding to a lottery element stored at least before the specific lottery element, the variation pattern determining means selects the special variation pattern,
The second variation time matching means is:
A gaming machine characterized by causing the variation pattern determination means to select the special variation pattern by rewriting at least a variation pattern determination element corresponding to a lottery element stored before the special lottery element. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 5,
The first variation time matching means includes:
At least the variation pattern determination element corresponding to the lottery element stored before the specific lottery element is not rewritten, and the variation pattern determination means is forcibly applied to the variation pattern determination means without using the variation pattern determination element. Select
The second variation time matching means is:
At least the variation pattern determination element corresponding to the lottery element stored before the special lottery element is not rewritten, and the variation pattern determination means is forcibly applied to the variation pattern determination means without using the variation pattern determination element. A game machine characterized by having a selection. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 7,
The first variation time matching means includes:
The total variation time of the symbols displayed in a variable manner by consumption of the specific lottery element and one or a plurality of lottery elements stored before the specific lottery element is matched with the total performance time of the destination determination effect. Let
The second variation time matching means is:
The total variation time of the symbol that is variably displayed by consuming the special lottery element and one or more lottery elements stored before the special lottery element is used as the total effect time of the special destination determination effect. A gaming machine characterized by matching. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 8,
The first variation time matching means includes:
The total effect time of the first determination effect is equally divided based on the specific lottery element excluded remaining storage number indicating the number of lottery elements stored before the specific lottery element, and the variation coincides with the equally divided time Causing the variation pattern determining means to select a special variation pattern having time;
The second variation time matching means is:
The total performance time of the special destination determination effect is equally divided based on the special lottery element excluded remaining storage number indicating the number of lottery elements stored before the special lottery element, and coincides with the equally divided time A gaming machine characterized by causing the variation pattern determining means to select a special variation pattern having a variation time. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 8,
The first variation time matching means includes:
Equally divide the total effect time of the first determination effect based on the specific lottery element and the number of lottery elements stored before the specific lottery element and based on the remaining lot number containing the specific lottery element A special variation pattern having a variation time corresponding to the measured time is selected by the variation pattern determination means,
The second variation time matching means is:
Equally dividing the total performance time of the special destination determination effect based on the special lottery element and the number of lottery elements stored before the special lottery element and the special lottery element-containing remaining memory number, etc. A gaming machine characterized by causing the variation pattern determining means to select a special variation pattern having a variation time corresponding to the divided time. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 10,
The destination determination effect execution means
During the one-time variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means, or to execute the destination determination effect across a plurality of variations of the symbol display by the symbol display means,
The special destination determination effect execution means
The special destination determination effect is executed during one symbol variation display by the symbol display means or across a plurality of symbol variation displays by the symbol display means,
When the total performance time of the destination determination effect is determined by the first total performance time determining means, the information on the total performance time of the destination determination effect and how many times the symbol variation display is used to determine the destination determination effect. First destination determination information notifying means for notifying the destination determination effect executing means of information about whether to execute,
When the total effect time of the special destination determination effect is determined by the second total effect time determining means, the special destination is obtained by using information on the total effect time of the special destination determination effect and how many times the symbols are changed. A gaming machine further comprising second destination determination information notifying means for notifying the special destination determination effect executing means of information about whether or not to execute the determination effect. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
The destination determination effect execution means
When performing the destination determination effect across a plurality of symbol variation displays by the symbol display means, the destination determination effect having continuity in the content of the effect is executed,
The special destination determination effect execution means
When the special destination determination effect is executed across a plurality of symbol variation displays by the symbol display means, the content of the effect has continuity, and the effect of the destination determination effect by the destination determination effect execution means And a special destination determination effect having continuity with the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
In the case of executing the special destination determination effect following the destination determination effect, it further comprises an effect content reorganization means for reorganizing at least a part of the effect content of the destination determination effect or the special destination determination effect. To play. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 8 to 13,
When the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means satisfies a predetermined reach generation condition, reach effect execution means for executing reach effect during execution of the variation display effect by the symbol effect execution means;
The first variation time matching means displays the total variation time of the symbols that are variably displayed by consuming the specific lottery element and one or more lottery elements stored before the specific lottery element. One or a plurality of lottery elements stored before the special lottery element and the special lottery element are consumed by the total production time of the judgment effect or by the second variation time matching means. When the total variation time of the symbols that are variably displayed is matched with the total effect time of the special destination determination effect, the reach determination effect execution unit does not execute the reach effect, but is executed by the destination determination effect execution unit. A special winner effect execution hand that executes a special winner effect indicating the result of the internal lottery during the execution of the destination determination effect or the special destination determination effect executed by the special destination determination effect execution means. Gaming machine and further comprising and.